JP5101729B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention, predetermined winning is concerned to a possible slot machines generated in response to the display results of the variable display, variable display device identification information of a plurality of types can be identified are each.

  Conventionally, as this type of slot machine, an internal lottery is performed to determine whether or not a winning is allowed, and when winning is won in this internal lottery, for example, a variable display device composed of a plurality of reels is won. Controls to match the combinations of symbols corresponding to winnings, and controls not to match the combinations of symbols corresponding to winnings that are not won in the internal lottery. Is common.

  As described above, there are mainly a control method and a table method as a method for controlling the combination of symbols corresponding to winning according to the result of the internal lottery so as not to be aligned or aligned. In the control method, when a stop operation is performed, it is determined whether or not the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is located within the drawing range to the winning line, and if the symbol is within the drawing range, the symbol is drawn into the winning line. If the symbol that does not correspond to the lottery result is located on the winning line, the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped on the winning line. The kick control is performed so as not to occur (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Further, in the table system, a reel table that defines a symbol to be stopped on the winning line at each stop operation timing is stored in advance, and when the stop operation is performed, a reel table corresponding to the lottery result of the game is stored. With reference to the timing at which the stop operation is performed, the above-described pull-in control and kick-off control are realized by performing control to stop the symbols determined on the reel table on the winning line (for example, Patent Documents) 1).

JP-A-2-283385

  As described above, in the case of using the control method as the control for deriving the display result of the variable display device, the pull-in control and the kicking control are uniquely performed according to the result of the internal lottery. It became monotonous and lacked interest. On the other hand, with the table method, by preparing a plurality of reel tables for one lottery result, it is possible to derive different display results even if the lottery result is the same. Although the display results can be diversified, it is necessary to perform a lottery for selecting one table from a plurality of reel tables with respect to one lottery result, and the control process increases. There was a problem of becoming complicated.

The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine that can enhance interest by the display result of the variable display device without complicating the control. .

In order to solve the above-described problem, a slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
A variable display device capable of deriving a display result to each of a plurality of variable display regions capable of variably displaying by rotating a display band in which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. With
With the game can be started by setting the bet number of the predetermined number for a game using the value for a game, one game by the display result on all of the plurality of variable display area Ru is derived finished, a slot machine winning is capable generated according to a combination of the display results derived in each of the plurality of variable display area as a result of one game,
Each derivation operation means operated when deriving the display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
Pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow a winning when the predetermined number of bets are set and the game is started ;
Derivation control means for performing control to derive the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
With
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where display results have not yet been derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas, the stepping at the time when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated for a variable display area for which display results have not yet been derived. The pre-determined from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify display results that can be derived within a range from the number of steps in the derivation operation to a predetermined number of steps relative to the number of steps in the derivation operation that is the number of steps of the motor A total variation control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the means ;
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. With respect to the variable display area, a display that can be derived within a range from the number of steps in the derivation operation to a predetermined number of steps ahead of the number of steps in the derivation operation when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated. Step of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means corresponding to the determination result of the pre-determination means and the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived is operated from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the result A control pattern selection means at the time of partial variation for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the number of already derived steps that is a number,
Including
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated in the situation where the display result has not yet been derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas, the control pattern selection at the time of total variation In the control pattern uniquely selected by the means for the variable display area corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination means, it is uniquely identified from the number of steps in the derivation operation when the derivation operation means is operated. There line control to derive the displayed results as a display result of the variable display area,
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated, the variable display area is uniquely determined by the partial variation control pattern selection means corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination means and the number of already derived steps. In the control pattern selected in the above, a control is performed for deriving a display result uniquely specified from the number of steps in the derivation operation at the time when the derivation operation means is operated as a display result of the variable display area,
The total variation control pattern selection unit is configured to select a first variable display region in which a derivation operation is performed first among the plurality of variable display regions when the determination result of the prior determination unit is a predetermined determination result. The number of derivation steps within the range in which the number of steps in the derivation operation is within a range from the number of steps in the derivation operation to a predetermined number of steps ahead and a predetermined display result corresponding to the predetermined determination result can be derived A predetermined control pattern selecting means for selecting a predetermined control pattern for specifying the predetermined display result when the first derivation step number and the second derivation step number different from the first derivation step number;
In the partial variation control pattern selection means, the determination result of the prior determination means is a predetermined determination result, the display result is already derived in the first variable display area, and the display result is the predetermined determination result. If the number of already derived steps at the time when the deriving operation means corresponding to the first variable display area is operated is the first number of deriving steps, the display result has not yet been derived. For the second variable display region, the range in which the number of steps at the time of the derivation operation is within a range from the number of steps at the time of the derivation operation to a predetermined number of steps and a specific display result corresponding to the predetermined determination result can be derived. A first control pattern that identifies the specific display result is selected when the number of derivation steps is a specific number of derivation steps, and the determination result of the predetermination means is a predetermined determination result The display result has already been derived in the first variable display area, and the display result is the predetermined display result, but the existing operation at the time when the deriving operation means corresponding to the first variable display area is operated. When the derivation step number is the second derivation step number, for the second variable display area, when the derivation operation step number is the specific derivation step number, other than the specific display result. Different control pattern selection means for selecting a second control pattern for specifying a display result,
The range required for one symbol to fluctuate consists of a number of consecutive steps.
Of the symbols corresponding to the number of derivation steps within the range in which the predetermined display result can be derived, all the step numbers constituting the range of one symbol are the first derivation step numbers, and the ranges of the other symbols are All the number of steps to be configured is the second number of derivation steps .
The slot machine according to means 1 of the present invention is:
Variable display capable of deriving and displaying the display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating a display band on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. Equipped with equipment,
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game by the betting number setting means, and a display result is derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas. Is a slot machine in which a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Each derivation operation means operated when deriving the display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
Pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow a prize to be generated before a display result of at least one variable display area is derived;
Derivation control means for performing control to derive the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
With
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where display results have not yet been derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas, the stepping at the time when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated for a variable display area for which display results have not yet been derived. Control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the pre-decision means from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify a display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the motor;
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the derivation operation means is operated in the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means. While performing control to derive the display result uniquely specified from the number of steps at the time as the display result of the variable display area,
The control pattern selection unit is configured to specify a specific display result from at least one of the number of steps when the determination result of the prior determination unit is a first determination result. When a specific control pattern is selected, and the determination result of the prior determination means is a second determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination result, the first specific control out of the number of steps Including a specific control pattern selection means for selecting a second specific control pattern in which the specific display result is specified from a larger number of steps than the pattern,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the step of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived in the situation where the display result has not yet been derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas. The control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the predetermining means is uniquely selected from the plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived for the number, and the control for deriving the display result to the corresponding variable display area is performed. Done. That is, there is only one control pattern applied to the determination result of one pre-determining unit, and it is not necessary to further select any one control pattern from a plurality of control patterns.
Further, when the determination result of the pre-decision means is the second determination result, the specific display result is specified from a larger number of steps than the first specific control pattern selected when the determination result is the first determination result. The second specific control pattern is selected and control for deriving the display result to the corresponding variable display area is performed. Therefore, when the determination result of the predetermination means is the second determination result, The specific display result is derived at a higher rate than when it is the determination result, and the specific display result is derived, whereby the determination result of the predetermining means is more advantageous to the player than the first determination result. It is possible to increase the player's expectation that the result is a second determination result.
For this reason, the interest by the display result of a variable display apparatus can be heightened, without complicating the control at the time of deriving the display result of a variable display apparatus.
The unique selection of the control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination means means that the same control pattern is always selected when the determination result of the prior determination means is the same. This does not prevent the selection of a common control pattern when the means determination results are different.
Further, the specific control pattern selection means selects the first specific control pattern only for any one variable display area when the determination result of the prior determination means is the first determination result, The first specific control pattern may be selected for any two or more variable display areas, or the first specific control pattern may be selected for all variable display areas. Similarly, when the determination result of the prior determination means is the second determination result, the second specific control pattern is selected only for any one of the variable display areas, or any two or more variable The second specific control pattern may be selected for the display area, or the second specific control pattern may be selected for all the variable display areas.

The slot machine according to means 2 of the present invention is:
Variable display capable of deriving and displaying the display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating a display band on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. Equipped with equipment,
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game by the betting number setting means, and a display result is derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas. Is a slot machine in which a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Each derivation operation means operated when deriving the display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
Pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow a prize to be generated before a display result of at least one variable display area is derived;
Derivation control means for performing control to derive the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
With
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. The variable display area is determined in advance from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify a display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated. Control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the means and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived,
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the derivation operation means is operated in the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means. While performing control to derive the display result uniquely specified from the number of steps at the time as the display result of the variable display area,
The control pattern selection unit is configured to specify a specific display result from at least one of the number of steps when the determination result of the prior determination unit is a first determination result. When a specific control pattern is selected, and the determination result of the prior determination means is a second determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination result, the first specific control out of the number of steps Including a specific control pattern selection means for selecting a second specific control pattern in which the specific display result is specified from a larger number of steps than the pattern,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the situation where the display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and the display result has not yet been derived in the other variable display areas, the display result has not yet been derived. From the plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated for the variable display area from which the derivation operation means is operated, A control pattern corresponding to the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived is uniquely selected, and control is performed to derive the display result from the corresponding variable display area. That is, there is only one control pattern applied to one display result in the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived as a result of determination by one prior determination means, and any one control pattern from a plurality of control patterns There is no need to select further.
Further, when the determination result of the pre-decision means is the second determination result, the specific display result is specified from a larger number of steps than the first specific control pattern selected when the determination result is the first determination result. The second specific control pattern is selected and control for deriving the display result to the corresponding variable display area is performed. Therefore, when the determination result of the predetermination means is the second determination result, The specific display result is derived at a higher rate than when it is the determination result, and the specific display result is derived, whereby the determination result of the predetermining means is more advantageous to the player than the first determination result. It is possible to increase the player's expectation that the result is a second determination result.
For this reason, the interest by the display result of a variable display apparatus can be heightened, without complicating the control at the time of deriving the display result of a variable display apparatus.
It is to be noted that when the control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination means and the display result of the variable display area for which the display result has already been derived is uniquely selected, the determination result of the prior determination means is the same, and When the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived is the same, it is always to select the same control pattern. If the determination result of the predetermining means is different, or the variable display from which the display result has already been derived This does not prevent the selection of a common control pattern when the display results of the areas are different.
Further, the control pattern selection means may be configured such that a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area. A plurality of variable display areas for which a display result has not yet been derived, for uniquely specifying a display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated From the control pattern, the control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the pre-decision means and the display result of the variable display area for which the display result has already been derived is uniquely selected. Display results have already been derived in at least one of the variable display areas, and display results are still in the other variable display areas. Display results derived for the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived in the situation where the display result has not been issued. The control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the predetermining means and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived may be uniquely selected from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely identify Even in this case, there is only one control pattern applied to one display result in the variable display area in which the display result has already been derived as a result of the determination by one pre-determining means, and a plurality of control patterns can be used. There is no need to further select any one of the control patterns, and the control for deriving the display result of the variable display device is not complicated.
In addition, the specific control pattern selection unit may be configured to select any one of the variable display regions from which the display result is not yet derived when the determination result of the prior determination unit is the first determination result. Only selecting the first specific control pattern, selecting the first specific control pattern for any two or more variable display areas among the variable display areas for which display results have not yet been derived, and still displaying results The first specific control pattern may be selected for all of the variable display areas from which the display results are not derived. Furthermore, the display results of the variable display areas from which the display results have already been derived are derived in a specific order. On the condition, the first specific control pattern may be selected for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived. Similarly, when the determination result of the prior determination means is the second determination result, the second specific control pattern is applied only to any one of the variable display areas from which the display result has not yet been derived. For selecting the second specific control pattern for any two or more variable display areas among the variable display areas for which display results have not yet been derived, or for the variable display for which display results have not yet been derived The second specific control pattern may be selected for all of the areas, and further, on the condition that the display results of the variable display areas from which the display results have already been derived are derived in a specific order. The second specific control pattern may be selected for the variable display area for which the display result is not derived.
In addition, the specific display result may be a display result derived to any one of the variable display areas, or a specific combination is determined by a combination with the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived. It may be a display result to be configured.

Further, in the means 1 and 2, the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or a maximum bet number. You may make it become. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
Further, in the means 1 and 2, the control pattern for uniquely specifying the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated is defined as the operation of the derivation operation means. This is a control pattern in which the same display result is always specified as the derived display result when the number of steps at the same time is the same. For example, the number of individual steps or a step number unit that is continuous within a certain range (for example, The amount of variation in which the amount of variation until the display result is derived is determined for each identification code (for example, symbol number, etc.) that can identify the step number unit). A control pattern that uniquely identifies a display result derived from the table with respect to the number of steps when the derivation operation means is operated, the number of individual steps, or Step at the time when the derivation operation means is operated from the priority table in which the priority of the derived display result is determined for each step number unit that is continuous within a certain range or for each identification code that can identify the step number unit. A control pattern that uniquely identifies a display result derived for a number is applicable. In addition, from the number of steps at the time when the derivation operation means is operated, pull-in control is performed so that the display result to be drawn is maximized within a predetermined pull-in range, so that the display result is not derivation prohibited. For those that perform kick-off control that pulls in display results other than those for which derivation is prohibited, if the display result derived from the number of steps at the time when the derivation operation means is operated is uniquely specified, This corresponds to the control pattern of the invention.
In the means 1 and 2, the second specific control pattern in which the specific display result is specified from the number of steps larger than the first specific control pattern among the number of steps is controlled by a variation amount table. If it is a pattern, a variation amount table in which a variation amount that is a specific display result for a larger number of steps, step number units, and identification codes than the variation amount table applied in the first specific control pattern is defined. If it is a control pattern to be applied and the control pattern is based on the priority table, a priority table in which the priority of the specific display result is set relatively higher than the priority table applied in the first specific control pattern is applied If the control pattern is a control pattern based on the pull-in control and the kick-off control, the first specific control pattern is selected. A control pattern for performing pull-in control to draw specific display results in a wide pull-in range than.
In the means 1 and 2, the second determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination result is a determination result that can be expected to acquire more game balls than the first determination result. For example, the first determination result corresponds to a result indicating that the occurrence of a special prize accompanying the transition to a gaming state in which a large number of game balls can be expected, and the second determination result is , A result indicating that the above-described special winning is permitted. In addition, as a first determination result, a result indicating that the occurrence of a first special prize accompanying a transition to a gaming state in which a first amount of gaming balls can be expected is permitted is applied. As a result of the determination, a result indicating that the occurrence of a second special prize accompanying a transition to a gaming state in which a second amount of game balls larger than the first amount can be expected is permitted is applied. May be.

The slot machine according to means 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 1 or 2,
The derivation control means has a predetermined number of steps when the derivation operation means is operated when the first specific control pattern is selected for at least one variable display area of the plurality of variable display areas. The specific display result is specified only when the display band is within a range rotated by one symbol from the number of steps, and control for deriving the specific display result is performed.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the determination result of the prior determination means is the first determination result, it is possible to reduce the rate at which the specific display result is derived as much as possible, and when the specific display result is derived Since the possibility that the determination result of the predetermination means is the second determination result is relatively increased, the determination result of the predetermination means is more game than the first determination result by deriving a specific display result. It is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the second determination result is advantageous to the player.
Note that the number of steps when the derivation control means operates the derivation operation means for at least one variable display area of the plurality of variable display areas is changed from the predetermined number of steps to the number of display bands. For example, the specific control pattern selection means determines the predetermination means to specify the specific display result only when it is within a range to be moved and to perform control for deriving the specific display result. When the result is the first determination result, within at least one of the plurality of variable display areas, the display band is rotated by one symbol from a predetermined number of steps. The step at the time when the derivation operation means is operated by selecting a control pattern in which the specific display result is specified only from a certain number of steps as the first specific control pattern. There is to perform control to derive the specific display results identified from the first specific control pattern when in the range in which the display range from the predetermined number of steps is 1 symbol worth rotation.

The slot machine according to means 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The specific control pattern selection unit includes a variation amount from when the derivation operation unit is operated until the specific display result is derived when the determination result of the prior determination unit is the second determination result. Selecting a control pattern that identifies the specific display result as the second specific control pattern from a different number of steps than when the first specific control pattern is selected.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the possibility that the determination result of the pre-decision means is the second determination result changes depending on the amount of variation until the specific display result is derived, the specific display result is derived. The interest that accompanies can be further enhanced.

The slot machine according to means 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The derivation control means rotates the display band by one pattern from a certain number of steps of the stepping motor when the derivation operation means is operated from the control pattern selected by the control pattern selection means. In the case where the number of steps is different within the range, a different display result is specified, and control for deriving the specified display result is performed.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if it is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, the display result derived by the timing of the stop operation can be changed, so the display result of the variable display device can be displayed in various ways. Can be derived.
Note that the number of steps of the stepping motor when the derivation control means is operated from the control pattern selected by the control pattern selection means from a certain number of steps to one display band from the control pattern selected by the control pattern selection means. For example, when the number of different steps is within a range to be rotated, different display results are specified, and control for deriving the specified display results is performed. The stepping motor at the time when the control pattern in which different display results are specified for different number of steps within the range in which the display band is rotated by one symbol is selected from the number, and the derivation operation means is operated When the number of steps is a different number of steps within a range in which the display band is rotated by one symbol from a certain number of steps, the control pattern It is to perform a control to derive the display results that are respectively specified to the different number of steps from the emissions.
In addition, the certain number of steps is the number of steps when a certain symbol of the display band is displayed at a reference position of the variable display device or the variable display area. The number of different steps within the range in which the belt is rotated by one symbol is different from the range in which the symbols arranged following a certain symbol of the display pair are displayed at the reference position. The number of steps.
Further, the derivation control means only when a control pattern in which a different display result is specified for a different number of steps within a range in which the display band is rotated by one symbol from a certain number of steps is selected. When the derivation operation means is operated, the number of steps of the stepping motor is different from the number of steps within a range in which the display band is rotated by one symbol from a certain number of steps. The number of steps may be different from the number of steps within a range in which the display band is rotated by one symbol from a certain number of steps. If a control pattern that identifies the same display result is selected, the stepping motor step at the time when the derivation operation means is operated Even if the number of steps is within a range in which the display band is rotated by one symbol from a certain number of steps, the same display result is specified, and control for deriving the specified display result is performed. May be.

The slot machine according to means 6 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before making the determination by the prior determination means;
A range that is determined so that the range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow for the occurrence of the numerical value data for determination input to the determination region can be specified for the winning Range specific data storage means for storing specific data;
With
The range specifying data storage means can specify a range of determination values that determine to allow the occurrence of both the special prize and the small role winning accompanied by the provision of a game ball as the range specifying data. Memorize overlapping range identification data,
The pre-determining unit determines whether or not the winning is determined depending on whether or not the determination value range specified by the range specifying data stored in the range specifying data storage unit includes the determination numerical data input to the determination region. Including a winning allowance determining means for determining whether or not the generation of a prize is permitted, and determining that the generation of a winning determined to be permitted by the permission determining means is permitted. ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the determination numerical data input to the determination area is included in the range of the determination value specified by the overlapping range specifying data, both the special prize and the small role winning are determined by the predetermining means. Since it is determined that the generation is allowed at the same time, when a small winning combination is generated as a result of the game, it can be expected that a special winning is permitted. Moreover, since it is possible to determine the special winning and the small winning combination by one allowance determining means, it is possible to simplify the processing by the prior determining means.
In addition, the range specifying data storage means, as the range specifying data, single range specifying data capable of specifying a range of determination values that determine that the occurrence of only the special winning is permitted, the special winning and It is also possible to store overlapping range specifying data that can specify the range of the judgment value that determines that both occurrences of the small role winning are allowed at the same time. As a result, even if a small winning prize does not occur, it is not denied that a special winning is permitted, so the player's expectation for the special winning can be maintained even in such a situation. .
In addition, the range specifying data storage means, as the range specifying data, single range specifying data capable of specifying a range of determination values for determining that only the small role winning is allowed, and the special winning And overlapping range specifying data that can specify the range of the determination value that determines that the occurrence of both of the small role winnings is allowed at the same time may be stored. As a result of this, even if a small winning combination is generated, it is not denied that the occurrence of a special winning is permitted, so that even in such a situation, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special winning can be maintained.

The slot machine according to means 7 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before making the determination by the prior determination means;
With respect to a small prize winning accompanied by the provision of a game ball, it is possible to specify a range of determination values that will determine that the pre-determining means allows the generation of numerical data for determination input in the determination area A small portion winning range specifying data storage means for storing range specifying data determined to be,
The special prize is determined so that a range of determination values that can be determined to be allowed to be generated by the pre-determining means for the determination numerical data input to the determination area can be specified. Special winning range specifying data storage means for storing range specifying data;
With
The determination value range that will determine that the pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the special prize is determined as the determination value that determines that the pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the small prize winning Including a range of decision values that overlaps the range of values,
The pre-determining means includes
Depending on whether or not the determination value range input by the determination area is included in the range of the determination value specified by the range specifying data stored in the small role winning range specifying data storage means, A small role winning allowance judging means for judging whether or not the occurrence is permitted,
Does the range of determination values specified by the range specifying data stored in the special winning range specifying data storage means include the same numerical value data for determination as that used by the small prize winning allowance determining means for determination? A special winning allowance judging means for judging whether or not the occurrence of the special winning is permitted depending on whether or not;
Including
The pre-decision means is
A determination is made as to whether or not the occurrence of a winning is permitted by both the small role winning permission determining means and the special winning permission determining means;
When it is determined that both the small role winning allowance determining means and the special winning allowance determining means indicate that the occurrence of a winning is permitted, it is determined that the occurrence of both the small winning a prize and the special winning is permitted. To
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the determination numerical data input to the determination area is included in the range of the determination value specified by the overlapping range specifying data, both the special prize and the small role winning are determined by the predetermining means. Since it is determined that the generation is allowed at the same time, when a small winning combination is generated as a result of the game, it can be expected that a special winning is permitted.
In addition, the range of the determination value that determines that the advance determination unit allows the occurrence of the special prize is determined to determine that the advance determination unit allows the occurrence of the small prize winning. A range of determination values that does not overlap with a range of determination values, and when the pre-determining means determines that only the special winning allowance determining means indicates that the winning is permitted, the special winning only In the case where it is determined that both the small prize winning allowance determining means and the special winning allowance determining means indicate that the occurrence of a winning is permitted, the small prize winning and the special winning It may be determined that the occurrence of both winnings is allowed, and in this way, even if no small role winning is generated as a result of the game, it is denied that the occurrence of a special winning is permitted. Not like this Also it is possible to maintain the player's expectation on the development of the special prize in the situation.
Further, the range of the judgment value that determines that the preliminary determination means allows the occurrence of the small prize winning is that the preliminary determination means determines that the special winning is permitted. A range of determination values that does not overlap with the range of determination values, and when the pre-determining means determines that only the small role winning allowance determining means indicates that the occurrence of a winning is permitted, When it is determined that the occurrence of only a winning is permitted, and both the small prize winning allowance determining means and the special winning allowance determining means indicate that the occurrence of winning is permitted, the small prize winning and It may be determined that the occurrence of both of the special prizes is allowed, and in this way, even if a small prize winning is generated as a result of the game, it is denied that the special winning is allowed to occur. Not so this situation Even put it is possible to maintain the player's expectation on the development of special pay.

In the means 6 and 7, the range specifying data determined so that the range of the determination value can be specified may be the data itself indicating the range of the determination value, or the determination value of each winning prize. The total number of values may be stored, and the range of determination values may be specified from the total number of determination values and the determination value of each winning prize. Also, the judgment value other than the winning prize determined last and the total number of judgment values are stored, and the remaining judgment value range excluding the judgment value other than the winning prize determined last from the total judgment value is finally determined. It may be one that can be specified as a range of determination values for winning.

The slot machine according to means 8 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
Based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means, one of the allowable stages is selected and set from a plurality of allowable stages having different ratios for determining that the pre-determination means allows the generation of a prize. An acceptable stage setting means
Data storage means for storing data for performing control of a game including data indicating the allowable stage set by the allowable stage setting means in a readable and writable manner;
Stored data determination means for determining whether or not the data stored in the data storage means is normal;
Disabling means for disabling the progress of the game when the stored data determination means determines that the data stored in the data storage means is not normal;
In a state where the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the progress of the game is performed on the condition that the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means based on the operation of the setting operation means. The disabling means for canceling the disabled state and allowing the game to proceed,
Comprising
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the data storage means, the progress of the game is disabled, and an allowable stage (set value) is newly set based on the operation of the setting operation means. If the game is not selected or set, the state where the progress of the game is disabled is not released. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the data storage means, it is not an allowable stage automatically set by the slot machine, but an allowable stage selected and set based on the operation of the setting operation means (general In addition, since the operation of the setting operation means is operated by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is played based on the permissible stage selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game should be ensured Can do.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a rear view of the slot machine. It is sectional drawing of the taking-in apparatus provided in the slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the wiring of a supply ball | bowl detection switch, a payout ball | bowl detection switch, and a payout ball clogging detection switch. It is a figure which shows the signal exchanged between a game control board, a payout control board, and a payout control board and a card unit. It is a timing chart which shows the operation | movement condition when the operation | movement of a payment switch is detected when the prize accompanying payout of a prize ball | bowl generate | occur | produces, or the state where a taken-in ball | bowl remains. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. (A) is a figure which shows the combination table according to gaming state. (B) is a figure which shows the classification table for a small combination and a re-game combination. (C) is a role-specific table for special roles. It is a figure which shows the memory area of the number of judgment values acquired based on the address registered into the table according to role. (A) (b) is a figure which respectively shows the example of the relationship between the value of the random number for internal lottery in the normal gaming state, the number of judgment values of each combination, and the winning combination. It is a figure which respectively shows the example of the relationship between the value of the random number for internal lottery in the normal gaming state, the number of determination values of each combination, and the winning combination. (A) is a figure which shows the example of the relationship between a winning combination and the value of the random number for internal lottery, the number of judgment values of each combination, and a regular bonus of a small role game. (A) is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of a random number generation circuit. (B) is explanatory drawing until a CPU processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit into the random number for internal lottery by software. It is a figure which shows the structure of the table index stored in ROM41b. It is a figure which shows an example of a stop control table. It is a figure which shows an example of a stop control table. It is a figure which shows an example of a stop control table. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of a continuous effect, (b) is a figure which shows the winning probability of a continuous effect lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process which CPU of a game control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the error process which CPU of a game control part performs when an error generate | occur | produces. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change process which CPU of a game control part performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which CPU of a game control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the adjustment control process which CPU of a game control part performs in a BET process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the taking-in control process which CPU of a game control part performs in a BET process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the random number acquisition process which CPU of a game control part performs in an internal lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (A) which CPU of a game control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (A) which CPU of a game control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the stop switch process which CPU of a game control part performs in a timer interruption process (A). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the interruption interruption process performed when CPU of a game control part inputs a voltage drop signal from an interruption detection circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (effect) which CPU of an effect control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (effect) which CPU of an effect control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the continuous effect process which CPU of an effect control part performs in a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the continuous effect process which CPU of an effect control part performs in a timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows the modification of a table classified by role. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the internal lottery process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is explanatory drawing of the 1st modification of a process until CPU processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit into the random number for internal lottery by software. It is explanatory drawing of the 2nd modification of the process until CPU processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit into the random number for internal lottery by software. It is a block diagram which shows the modification of a structure of a slot machine.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a base frame 1a (see FIG. 2) fixed to a game island. A main body frame 1b (see FIG. 2) pivotally supported on the side end of the base frame 1a, and a front door 1c pivotally supported on the side end of the main body frame 1b. It is configured.

  Inside the main body frame 1b of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are horizontally arranged. As shown in FIG. 1, the three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1c. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are distinguished from each other such as “7”, “BAR”, “JAC”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “bell”, and “replay”. A plurality of possible types of symbols are drawn 21 in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko ball used for the game and an upper plate 26 for storing (waiting for) the pachinko ball paid out from the payout device 200 are located below the fluoroscopic window 3 in the front door 1c. The provided operation console 4 is formed so as to bulge forward, and below that is a lower plate 25 for storing pachinko balls overflowing from the upper plate 26 and pachinko balls returned from the upper plate 26. Is provided. An outlet 25a for taking out pachinko balls stored in the lower dish 25 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower dish 25, and the outlet is removed by a sliding operation of a lever 25b provided at the front portion of the lower dish 25. By opening the shutter 25c that closes the 25a, the pachinko balls stored in the lower plate 25 flow out to a ball box (not shown) disposed below the lower plate 25, and the pachinko balls stored in the lower plate 25 are removed. It can be easily taken out.

  Further, on the upper surface of the operation table 4, a specified number determined according to the game state from the one-ball take-in switch 5 and the upper plate 26 operated when instructing to take in one pachinko ball from the upper plate 26. It is operated when instructing the take-in of the number of pachinko balls necessary to set the number of bets (3 in the normal game state and small role game described later in this embodiment, and 1 in the regular bonus described later). MAXBET switch 6, when the collected balls are settled and returned to the upper plate 26, or pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26 and pachinko balls in the capture device 100 described later are returned to the lower plate 25. The settlement switch 10 that is operated when the game starts, the start switch 7 that is operated when the game is started, and the remaining value of the valuable value read from the prepaid card being received is displayed on the card unit 400 arranged in parallel. Return the prepaid card being accepted to the card lending switch 29 and the card unit 400 arranged in parallel, which are operated when receiving the lending of the pachinko ball within the range of the remaining value of the value displayed on the indicator 28 and the remaining amount indicator 28 A return switch 30 that is operated when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped is disposed on the front surface of the operation table 4, and stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is provided.

  Further, the MAXBET switch 6 has a built-in BET switch effective LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the pachinko ball taking-in operation by the operation of the one-ball taking-in switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. The stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R have left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is valid by lighting. 4) is built in each.

  In addition, between the see-through window 3 and the operation table 4 in the front door 1c, the number of used balls used for setting the number of bets taken in by operating the one-ball take-in switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 was taken in. However, since it is less than the required unit number of balls (5 balls in this embodiment) when setting the minimum unit bet number, it is the sum of the number of unused balls that have not yet been used for setting the bet number. The number of balls already paid out and the number of balls already paid out of the number of winning balls associated with the occurrence of winnings are displayed. And a game auxiliary indicator 12 that displays an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs, 1 BET LED 14 that lights up that 1 bet is set, and lights up that 2 bets are set 2BETLED15, 3 bets set 3BETLED 16 that informs that it is being lit, capture request LED 17 that informs that a pachinko ball can be taken in is lit, and that the start operation of the game by operating the start switch 7 is valid A start valid LED 18, a wait LED 19 that lights up to indicate that a wait is in progress (a state in which a reel rotation has not started since a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the previous game), and a replay game to be described later A replaying LED 20 is provided to notify the effect by lighting.

  In addition, the pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26 are returned to the lower plate 25 through the ball removal passage 120 without passing through the take-in device 100 described later at the upper position of the operation table 4 in the front door 1c. A ball removal lever 31 is provided which is operated when the operation is performed.

  The upper plate 26 opened on the upper surface of the operation table 4 and having an open upper surface is composed of a storage portion that is formed wider in the front-rear direction, and a strip-shaped rectification portion that has a shorter front-rear width than the storage portion. The pachinko balls thrown into the storage part are divided into three strips by two rectifying plates facing the left-right direction installed on the rectifying unit, although not shown in detail, and are taken into the preparation preparation ball passage 110. It flows in and is supplied to the capture device 100.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26 are divided into three strips by the rectifying unit and supplied to the capture device 100, so that the pachinko balls from the upper plate 26 to the capture device 100 are supplied. It is possible to improve the supply speed, and thereby the pachinko ball uptake speed by the uptake apparatus 100 can also be improved. In this embodiment, it is constituted by three straightening passages, but it may be two or four or more passages.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the downstream part of the rectifying part, that is, the connecting part with the take-in preparation ball passage 110 for guiding and supplying the pachinko ball flowing in from the upper plate 26 to the take-in device 100 is provided. In addition, an outflow port 121 for allowing the pachinko ball flowing down the rectifying unit to flow out into the ball passage 120 is formed. The outlet 121 is opened and closed by an open / close shutter 122 provided to open and close in conjunction with the sliding operation of the ball removal lever 31, and by opening the open / close shutter 122, The pachinko balls flow down from the outlet 121 in the ball removal passage 120, join a return ball guide passage 109 described later, are discharged from the discharge outlet 9, and are returned to the lower plate 25. That is, by opening and closing the opening / closing shutter 122 by operating the ball removal lever 31, the ball connected to the take-up preparation ball passage 110 side that communicates the pachinko ball flow path of the upper plate 26 to the take-in device 100 or the lower plate 25. The pachinko ball of the upper plate 26 is returned to the lower plate 25 without passing through the take-in device 100 by switching to either the extraction passage 120 or the return ball guiding passage 109 side and opening the opening / closing shutter 122. The

  The upper plate 26 is formed in a dish shape whose upper surface is open, so that the stored pachinko balls can be taken out from above by hand, and the pachinko that has flowed down into the operation table 4. The sphere flows down in the take-in preparation sphere passage 110 arranged inside the operation table 4 and is guided to an after-mentioned taking-in device 100 which is also arranged inside the operation table 4. That is, the pachinko ball that has flowed into the take-in preparation sphere passage 110, except for the remaining sphere transparent window 130 (see FIG. 3) formed between the frequency indicator 28 and the start switch 7 on the upper surface of the operation table 4, The structure is invisible from the outside and cannot be taken out by hand.

  Inside the front door 1c, a set value display 24 (see FIG. 4) for displaying a set value at that time is provided while changing a set value and confirming the set value, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 1, a take-in device 100 for taking the pachinko balls supplied from the upper plate 26 is provided inside the operation table 4.

  As shown in FIG. 3, in the take-in device 100, three sprockets 106 for ball cutting are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction corresponding to the respective strips of the take-in preparation ball passage 110 (in FIG. 3, Only the front sprocket is visible.) Two notches are formed on the outer periphery of the sprocket 106, and when the sprocket 106 is rotated by driving the take-in motor 101, pachinko balls that have entered the notch are discharged downward one by one. It has become. Further, the notches of the sprockets 106 corresponding to the respective strips are arranged so that the arrangement positions in the circumferential direction are different from each other (six notches of the three sprockets 106 are arranged at intervals of 60 degrees), As the three sprockets 106 rotate synchronously, pachinko balls are discharged for each sprocket 106.

  The pachinko balls supplied to the sprocket 106 from the two take-up preparation ball passages 110 out of the three take-up preparation ball passages 110 are discharged from the two sprockets 106 and then merged downstream. Then, it flows down into a take-in ball guide passage 108 or a return ball guide passage 109 described later.

  In the present embodiment, the case preparation members constituting the external shape of the preparation preparation sphere passage 110 and the acquisition device 100 are all formed of a transparent synthetic resin material. The pachinko sphere flowing down in the apparatus 100 is configured to be visible from the outside through the remaining sphere transparent window 130 formed on the upper surface of the operation table 4.

  Below the sprocket 106, it swings when the sorting solenoid 102 is excited or released, and the flow path of the pachinko sphere discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 is either the take-in ball guide passage 108 or the return ball guide passage 109. A flow path switching valve 107 for switching to one side is provided.

  The flow path switching valve 107 is composed of two flow path switching valves 107 arranged in each of the two passages on the upstream side of the intake ball guiding path 108 and the return ball guiding path 109. The lower end of the flow path switching valve 107 is connected to the lower end of the link member 124 whose center is pivotally supported at the tip of the telescopic shaft 102a of the sorting solenoid 102, and is a swing shaft that extends in the horizontal direction over the two passages. 107a is fixed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3, the expansion and contraction shaft 102a expands and contracts by excitation or release of the sorting solenoid 102, so that the link member 124 rotates about the shaft portion and rotates the swing shaft 107a around the axis. Therefore, the flow path switching valve 107 swings around the swing shaft 107a. Further, since the telescopic shaft 102a of the sorting solenoid 102 is always urged in the extending direction by a coil spring (not shown) that is mounted around the telescopic shaft 102a in an unexcited state, the distal end of the telescopic shaft 102a. The flow path switching valve 107 connected to each other via the link member 124 is configured to remove the flow path of the pachinko balls taken in by the sprocket 106 when the sorting solenoid 102 is not excited (off state). It is always urged toward a position (a position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 3) on the side of the ball guide passage 108.

  Further, the upper end of the link member 124 is when the pachinko ball flow path is switched to the return ball guiding passage 109, that is, when the flow path switching valve 107 is in the standing position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. It is detected by a flow path detection switch 115 provided near the main body of the sorting solenoid 102. In this way, depending on the detection status of the link member 124 by the flow path detection switch 115, the flow path switching valve 107 determines whether the flow path of the pachinko sphere is on the intake ball guide path 108 side or the return ball guide path 109 side. That is, the actual flow path direction of the pachinko ball by the flow path switching valve 107 can be detected.

  An intake ball detection switch 105 is disposed below the flow path switching valve 107 and connected to the intake ball guiding passage 108, and is discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106. Pachinko balls distributed to the incoming ball guide passage 108 are detected. On the other hand, a return ball detection switch 103 is arranged at a connection portion with the return ball guide passage 109, and is discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 and is assigned to the return ball guide passage 109 side by the flow path switching valve 107. A sphere is detected.

  Next, when the take-in device 100 takes the pachinko ball guided from the upper plate 26 in order to set the bet number and discharges it to the game island without returning it to the player, the distribution solenoid 102 is excited. The state is stopped. In this state, since the flow path switching valve 107 is at the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 3, the pachinko ball discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 is guided to the intake ball guide passage 108 side, and the intake ball detection switch 105 Is detected, and then flows down the take-in ball guiding passage 108 to the rear side of the slot machine 1 and is collected in an out ball tank inside the game island (not shown).

  When the pachinko ball on the upper plate 26 is discharged (returned) to the lower plate 25, the sorting solenoid 102 is in an excited state. In this state, the flow path switching valve 107 swings against the urging force of the coil spring to a position indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 3, and the pachinko ball discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 is returned to the return ball guiding path 109. Then, after being detected by the return ball detection switch 103, it flows down the return ball guide passage 109 and is discharged from the payout port 9 to the lower plate 25 and returned to the player. . The sorting solenoid 102 is in a state where excitation is stopped except when the pachinko ball of the upper plate 26 is discharged (returned) to the lower plate 25. That is, except for the case where the pachinko balls on the upper plate 26 are discharged (returned) to the lower plate 25, the flow path switching valve 107 is at the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 3 and the flow of the pachinko balls discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 The road direction is on the side of the take-in ball guide passage 108.

  Further, a return ball clogging detection switch 111 (see FIGS. 1 and 4) for detecting clogging of the ball in the passage is provided at a position in the vicinity of the lower plate 25 in the return ball guiding passage 109. For example, the lower plate 25 Since the tank is full, it can be detected that the return ball guiding passage 109 is clogged with a ball.

  The lower part of the above-described take-in device 100, take-in preparation ball passage 110, ball removal passage 120, take-in ball guide passage 108, return ball guide passage 109, and payout ball guide passage 208 is the operation table 4 and the operation table. 4 is covered with a cover panel 4a (see FIG. 1) that forms a lower front surface, and in particular, a pachinko ball that has flowed into the take-in preparation ball passage 110 and the take-in device 100 cannot be taken out. In the vicinity of the upper position of the take-in device 100 on the upper surface of the operation table 4, the pachinko balls remaining in the take-in preparation ball passage 110 (in the take-in device 100), specifically, the ball removal lever 31 are operated. Even after the pachinko balls on the upper plate 26 are removed through the ball removal passage 120, the pachinko balls remain in the take-in preparation ball passage 110 and enter the inside of the cover panel 4a so that they can no longer be seen. A remaining spherical see-through window 130 is formed as a light-transmitting portion made of a transparent panel.

  As described above, since the take-up preparation ball passage 110 and the case cover of the take-in device 100 are formed of a transparent resin material, the player passes through the remaining ball see-through window 130 in the take-up preparation ball passage 110 ( Whether or not the pachinko balls remain in the capture device 100) can be visually confirmed from the outside of the slot machine 1. Therefore, the player can surely recognize when the pachinko ball remains in the capture preparation ball passage 110, so that the pachinko ball remains in the capture preparation ball passage 110. Regardless, it is possible to avoid the player from being disadvantaged by ending the game.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, in the main body frame 1b, a pachinko ball supplied from a game island or the like on which the slot machine 1 is installed is disposed above the upper plate 26 to the upper plate 26. Is provided. The pachinko balls paid out from the payout device 200 flow down the payout ball guide passage 208 extending downward from the payout device 200, and a communication port formed on the storage portion 26 a side in the upper plate 26. 13 is paid out to the upper plate 26. Further, the payout ball guide passage 208 is extended from the communication port 13 toward the lower plate 25 below, and surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate 26 because the upper plate 26 is full are discharged ball guide passages 208. Is discharged from the discharge outlet 9 to the lower plate 25.

  The main body frame 1b faces the see-through window 3 of the front door 1c so that the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R (see FIG. 4), and the reels 2L, 2C and 2R described above are provided. A reel unit (not shown) comprising reel sensors 33 (see FIG. 4) each capable of detecting a reference position is provided, and a switch panel (not shown) facing the front door 1c is provided below the reel unit. Is provided. This switch panel includes a stop switch 36 for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling a stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later. (Refer to FIG. 4), functioning as a setting key switch 37 (see FIG. 4) for switching to the setting change mode at startup, and as a reset switch for releasing the error state and the stop state except for the RAM abnormal error in the normal state. In the setting change mode, a reset / setting switch 38 (see FIG. 4) that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (payout rate) of internal lottery described later is provided. By opening the front door 1c, the stop switch 36, the setting key switch 37, and the reset / setting switch 38 disposed on the switch panel can be operated from the front of the slot machine 1.

  A power supply unit (not shown) that houses a power supply board 75 to be described later is provided behind the switch panel, and a power switch 39 (shown in FIG. 4), and by opening the body frame 1b, the power switch 39 provided on the side surface of the power supply unit can be operated.

  The main body frame 1b includes a game control board 40 for controlling the game, a payout control board 60 for controlling the payout of pachinko balls, an effect control board 90 for controlling the effects, and driving of the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1. A power supply board 75 that generates power and supplies the power to each unit is provided.

  Among these boards, the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 are housed in one housing case 150 formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, as shown in FIG. It is arranged on the back side. The effect control board 90 is disposed on the front door 1c side of the main body frame 1b, and the power board 75 is disposed between the housing case 150 and the switch panel described above while being housed in the power unit described above. Has been.

  The housing case 150 in which the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 are housed is composed of a case body that can house the board and a case cover that can open and close the opening of the case body, although not particularly shown. A plurality of sealing pieces into which one-way screws (screws that can be rotated only in one direction by a screwdriver) are screwed are provided on the left and right sides of the case body and the case cover.

  The storage case 150 configured in this manner is configured such that, for example, one of the left and right sealing pieces of the case main body and the case cover is screwed into only one sealing piece on each of the left and right sides, and the tip of the one way screw is Further, by screwing into a mounting hole (not shown) formed on the back surface of the slot machine 1, the case cover is opened and the housing case 150 is opened unless the mounting-related portion related to the mounting of the sealing piece or the like is destroyed. So that the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 are improperly modified or replaced with an illegal board. .

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko balls supplied to the slot machine 1 are stored in a supply tank 204 provided at the upper back of the main body frame 1b, and are passed through a ball supply passage 210 extending from the supply tank. It flows down and is supplied to the dispensing device 200. The ball supply passage 210 includes three passages (not shown), and the pachinko balls flowing out from the replenishing tank 204 are supplied to the dispensing device 200 in a state of being divided into the three passages. . A supply ball detection switch 205 is provided at a predetermined height position above the payout device 200 in the ball supply passage 210 in correspondence with each line, and the pachinko supplied to the payout device 200 by the supply ball detection switch 205. Whether or not the ball is waiting is detected. In the present embodiment, the supply ball detection switch 205 is a position where it is possible to detect that 75 balls, which is the maximum number of winning balls to be paid out by the payout device 200 when a winning is accompanied by paying out a prize ball, is supplied. The pachinko ball required for paying out the maximum number of winning balls is detected. Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of balls taken in by the take-in device 100 is 15, and a maximum of 15 pachinko balls are paid out by the pay-out device 200 based on the operation of the checkout switch 10. The supply ball detection switch 205 detects whether or not a pachinko ball necessary for paying out the number of balls to be paid out is waiting based on the checkout switch 10. Furthermore, in this embodiment, lending of 25 balls is requested by a single lending request from the card unit 400. Even in this case, the supply ball detection switch 205 pays out the number of balls to be paid out based on the lending request. It is detected whether or not the pachinko balls necessary for the waiting are waiting.

  The payout device 200 is configured in substantially the same manner as the take-in device 100, although not particularly shown in detail, and is driven by a payout motor 201 (see FIG. 4) corresponding to each item of the ball supply passage 210. A rotating sprocket (not shown) is provided. Also, below the sprocket, a payout ball detection switch 202 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the passage of a pachinko ball discharged by the sprocket based on the payout of a prize ball or the like is provided. After the discharged pachinko ball is detected by the payout ball detection switch 202, it is discharged into the payout ball guide passage 208 extending from the lower part of the payout device 200.

  The payout ball guide passage 208 extends to the lower plate 25, and the pachinko balls discharged from the payout device 200 flow down the payout ball guide passage 208 and are discharged from the communication port 27 to the upper plate 26. The surplus sphere overflowing from 26 is paid out to the lower plate 25 from the payout opening 9. In addition, a payout ball clogging detection switch 112 (see FIGS. 1 and 4) for detecting a ball clogging in the passage is provided at a position in the vicinity of the lower plate 25 in the payout ball guiding passage 208. For example, the lower plate 25 Because of the full tank, it is possible to detect whether or not the payout ball guide passage 208 is clogged with a ball.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided in parallel with a card unit 400 that accepts a prepaid card in which a valuable value is recorded. From the card unit 400 based on the operation of the above-described ball rental switch 29, In response to this request, it is possible to lend a pachinko ball using the valuable value recorded on the prepaid card being accepted.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a bet number is set using the pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26. It is possible to set only a specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state. In this embodiment, the betting number includes a regular bonus, a small bonus game in a big bonus, and a normal gaming state. Of these, 1 is set as the specified number of bets corresponding to the regular bonus, and 3 is set as the specified number of bets corresponding to the small role game and the normal gaming state. When the player is in the regular bonus, only one bet can be set, and when the game state is the small role game and the normal game state, only three bets can be set. In this embodiment, 5 balls, which are necessary for setting the minimum unit bet for 1 bet, are taken in, and 15 balls are taken for 3 bet. The number of bets is set by taking pachinko balls of these numbers.

  In order to set the bet number, the one-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. In this embodiment, when one ball take-in switch 5 is operated, one pachinko ball is taken in from the pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26, and when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, it is stored in the upper plate 26. The number of pachinko balls necessary to set a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state at that time is taken in from the pachinko balls.

  In addition, the pachinko balls taken in by the take-in device 100 in order to set the bet number in accordance with the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 in this way are set in the take-in ball guide passage 108 as described above. It flows down, is taken into the inside of the slot machine 1, that is, the back side as seen from the side facing the player in the slot machine 1, and is discharged to the out ball tank provided inside the game island (not shown) as described above. The

  When a predetermined number of bets corresponding to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) are valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. . In this embodiment, the game can be started when the specified number of bets according to the gaming state is set. For example, the betting number is set within the range of the specified number according to the gaming state. The game may be started when at least one bet number is set.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the game starts and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary as the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate.

  When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate at a constant speed after the game starts, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes valid, and in this state, any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated. Then, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination on each of the activated pay lines L1-L5 is a reel 2L, 2C, 2R. When the display result is stopped, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of pachinko balls (principal balls) are paid out from the payout device 200 according to the win, and directly through the payout ball guide passage 208, the upper plate 26 Is paid to the player and given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, different numbers of prize balls are given according to the combination of symbols. In particular, the number of unit balls (5 balls) is required to set one bet, whereas the number of prize balls awarded in response to the occurrence of a prize is the number of unit balls (5 balls). It is possible to give pachinko balls of any number according to the winnings up to 75 balls as the upper limit, and the number of winning balls given when these winnings occur Can be set more finely according to each prize.

  In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 7, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, a payout control board 60, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 75. The game control board 40 mainly controls the game. The payout control board 60 controls the payout of the pachinko balls, the effect control board 90 controls the effect according to the progress of the game, and the power supply board 75 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1. And supplied to each part.

  The power supply board 75 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply. The game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the payout control board 60 and the effect control board 90 connected via. The power switch 39 is connected to the power board 75.

  On the game control board 40, the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reel sensor 33, the stop switch 36, the setting key switch 37, Various switches such as a reset / setting switch 38, a take-in ball detection switch 105, a return ball detection switch 103, a return ball clogging detection switch 111, and a flow path detection switch 115 are connected, and via a payout control board 60. The aforementioned payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205 are connected, and detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the above-described captured / paid-off ball display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1-3BET LEDs 14-16, capture request LED 17, start valid LED 18, wait LED 19, and replaying. Electrical components such as LED 20, BET switch valid LED 21, left, middle and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, set value display 24, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, take-in motor 101, and sorting solenoid 102 are connected. These electric components are driven based on the control of a game control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The game control unit 41 controls the game, and random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in this embodiment). A random number generation circuit 42 for generating, a sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit 44 for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 75 The reel motor drive circuit 45 that drives the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the take-in motor drive circuit 50 that drives the take-in motor 101, the solenoid drive circuit 46 that drives the sorting solenoid 102, and the game control board 40 LED drive circuit 47 for driving various displays and LEDs connected to the slot, slot When the power supply voltage supplied to the thin 1 is monitored and a voltage drop is detected, a power drop detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the game control unit 41, when the power is turned on or from the CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 for providing a reset signal to the CPU 41a when an initialization command is not input for a certain period, and various other devices and circuits are mounted.

  The CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, and executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the game control unit 41.

  The game control unit 41 includes a signal input terminal DATA, and detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 are input to the input port via these signal input terminals DATA. The input states of these signal input terminals DATA are monitored by the CPU 41a, and the CPU 41a executes a basic process that shifts in stages according to the input states of the signal input terminals DATA, that is, the detection states of various switches.

  In addition, the CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In this embodiment, four types of interrupts of interrupts 0 to 3 can be executed, and a counter mode (signal input from a trigger terminal CLK / TRG provided separately from the signal input terminal DATA is provided for each interrupt. Can be selected and set between an interrupt mode that generates an external interrupt according to the number of times) and a timer mode (an interrupt mode that generates an internal interrupt according to the number of clock inputs of the CPU 41a).

  In this embodiment, among interrupts 0 to 3, interrupt 2 is set to the counter mode, interrupts 0 and 1 are set to the timer mode, and interrupt 3 is unused. The trigger terminal CLK / TRG is connected to the above-described power interruption detection circuit 48, and the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 2 in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 48 to interrupt the power interruption. Execute the process. In addition, the CPU 41a performs a time interval (this time) when the number of clock inputs assigned to the interrupt 1 reaches the first specified number, that is, the number of clock inputs assigned to the interrupt 1 reaches the first specified number. In the embodiment, an interrupt 1 is generated every approximately 0.56 ms) to execute a timer interrupt process (A) for detecting switches and controlling the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, etc. Each time the number of clock inputs assigned to the interrupt 0 reaches the second specified number, that is, the time interval for the number of clock inputs assigned to the interrupt 0 to reach the second specified number (in this embodiment, approximately 0 .4 ms), an interrupt 0 is generated and a timer interrupt process (B) for controlling the drive of the take-in motor 101 is executed. Moreover, although the interruption 3 is set to unused, the interruption 3 may generate | occur | produce with noise etc. For this reason, when the interrupt 3 occurs, the CPU 41a executes an unused interrupt process that immediately returns to the original process.

  In addition, the CPU 41a is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of an interrupt process based on the occurrence of any one of interrupts 0 to 3, and a plurality of interrupts occurred simultaneously. In this case, the priority is set to be executed in the order of interrupts 2, 1, 0, and 3. That is, when interrupt 2 and other interrupts occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 is prioritized and when interrupt 1 and interrupt 0 or 3 occur simultaneously, interrupt 1 is prioritized. When interrupt 0 and interrupt 3 occur at the same time, interrupt 0 is executed with priority.

  Further, the CPU 41a temporarily stores the data in use stored in the register in a later-described stack area provided in the RAM 41c at the start of the interrupt process based on the occurrence of any of the interrupts 0 to 3. The data saved in the stack area at the end of the interrupt process is returned to the register.

  As the RAM 41c, a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) is used, and a refresh operation is required to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 41a is provided with a refresh register 41R (see FIG. 42) for performing this refresh operation. The refresh register 41R is composed of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction from the ROM 41b, and the value is updated every execution time of one instruction. Is called.

  Further, the game control unit 41 is supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It is like that.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number. In this embodiment, 0 to 65535 is defined as the range. The CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 in accordance with the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are not used as they are extracted by the hardware random number function, but are processed and used by software. Details thereof will be described in detail. The CPU 41a also has a function of updating the numerical value of the specific address in the RAM 41c by the above-described timer interrupt process (A) and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a software random number function). .

  The CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 inputs / outputs various signals to / from the payout control board 60 via the I / O port 41d. The input / output of signals between the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 will be described later.

  The payout control board 60 is connected to the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205 described above, and the detection signals of these connected switches are input. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, the detection signal transmission lines of the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205 are branched on the payout control board 60 and also to the game control board 40. The detection signals of these switches are also input to the game control board 40.

  In this embodiment, the detection signal transmission lines of the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205 are branched on the payout control board 60 and input to the game control board 40. Although the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205 are connected to the game control board 40, the transmission line of the detection signal is branched on the game control board 40. The game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 may be configured to input detection signal transmission lines of the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205. It may be possible to branch on a separately provided relay board and input to both the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60. .

  Further, the transmission lines of the detection signals of the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the supply ball detection switch 205 to the game control board 40 are used when the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 communicate with each other. It is connected to the game control board 40 through a single cable integrated together with the transmission line to be used, and the payout ball clogging detection switch 112, the payout ball detection switch 202, and the connector for connecting the cable and each board are also supplied. The detection signal transmission line of the ball detection switch 205 is shared by the transmission line used when the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 communicate with each other.

  Also, the payout control board 60 is connected to electrical components such as the payout motor 201 described above, and these electrical components are driven based on control by a payout control unit 61 (described later) mounted on the payout control board 60. It has become so.

  The payout control board 60 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 61a, a ROM 61b, a RAM 61c, and an I / O port 61d, similar to the game control part 41, and a payout control part 61 that controls the payout of pachinko balls. A switch detection circuit 62 that detects a detection signal input from a switch connected to the substrate 60, a payout motor drive circuit 63 that drives the payout motor 201, a display drive circuit 64 that drives various LEDs, etc. A reset circuit 65 that gives a reset signal to the CPU 61a when the initialization command from the CPU 61a is not input for a certain period, other circuits, and the like are mounted. The CPU 61a can output a signal output from the game control board 40 or a payout control. In response to a detection signal from a switch connected to the substrate 60, the pachinko ball is paid out. The payout control is performed, and the control of the control circuit mounted on the payout control board 60 is performed directly or directly while lending the pachinko ball according to the request from the card unit 400 connected via the connection terminal board 70. Control indirectly.

  Similar to the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41, the CPU 61a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt. The CPU 61a performs a timer interrupt process (payout) for generating a pachinko ball payout control or a lending control by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a fixed number, that is, every fixed time interval (about 2 ms). Execute. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 61a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Further, unlike the game control unit 41, the payout control unit 61 is not supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 61c is not held at the time of a power failure.

  The CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 includes a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) disposed on the front door 1c, an effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, reel LEDs 55 that irradiate the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from behind. Electrical components are connected, and these electrical components are driven based on control by a later-described effect control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  Like the game control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and an I / O port 91d. The effect control board 91 and the effect control board 90 control the effect. A liquid crystal driving circuit 92 for driving the connected liquid crystal display 51, a lamp driving circuit 93 for driving the effect LED 52, an audio output circuit 94 for controlling audio output from the speakers 53, 54, when the power is turned on or from the CPU 91a The reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the CPU 91a when the initialization command is not input for a certain period of time, and other circuits are mounted. The CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40 and produces an effect. Various parts of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90 while performing various controls Directly or indirectly control.

  As with the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41, the CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt. An interruption terminal (not shown) of the effect control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the game control unit 41 transmits a command among command transmission lines. A command reception interrupt process for generating an interrupt based on the input and receiving a command transmitted from the game control unit 41 is executed. Further, the CPU 91a generates an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain time interval (about 1.12 ms), and executes a timer interruption process (effect) described later. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Further, unlike the CPU 41a, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal (INT), the CPU 91a interrupts the process even when an interrupt process based on another interrupt is being executed. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the top, and even if another interrupt occurs at the same time, the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority.

  In addition, the production control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 91a performs a refresh operation so that the data stored in the RAM 91c is retained. It has become.

  Next, signals input / output in the game control board 40, the payout control board 60, and the card unit 400 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the game control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40 confirms the connection check between the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 on the payout control board 60 side. To output a game control board connection confirmation signal. Then, the payout control unit 61 mounted on the payout control board 60 confirms the connection with the game control board 40 based on the detection of the game control board connection confirmation signal. In addition, the game control unit 41 gives the payout control board 60 a ball number signal indicating a value of 0 to 100 as the number of balls instructing payout by a settlement request or a payout request, Of the number of balls used and the number of used balls used to set the number of bets and the number of unused balls not yet used to set the number of bets) or a settlement request signal for requesting the settlement of the number of unused balls The payout request signal for requesting the payout of the prize ball is output. Then, when the payout control unit 61 detects the settlement request signal or the payout request signal, the payout control unit 61 performs payout control for paying out the number of pachinko balls indicated by the ball number signal at that time.

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 61 makes a payout control board connection confirmation signal for checking the connection confirmation between the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 on the game control board 40 side, the card unit 400 to the game control board 40. And an in-operation signal indicating the start, operation, and end of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payment request or payout request. Then, the game control unit 41 confirms the connection with the payout control board 60 based on the detection of the payout control board connection confirmation signal, and connects the payout control board 60 and the card unit 400 based on the detection of the card unit connection signal. Based on the detection of the in-operation signal, the start, operation, and end of the pachinko ball payout operation by the payout control unit 61 are confirmed.

  The card unit 400 includes a control unit on which a microcomputer is mounted. As shown in FIG. 6, the remaining amount indicator 28 provided in the slot machine 1 is connected to the card unit 400 via a connection terminal plate 70, and the remaining amount is controlled by the microcomputer mounted on the control unit. The display 28 is driven. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the card unit 400 is connected to the above-described ball rental switch 29 and the return switch 30 provided in the slot machine 1 via a connection terminal plate 70, and detection signals of these switches are detected. Is input to the control unit.

  The card unit 400 also includes a card reader / writer that reads and writes the recorded information of the prepaid card inserted from the card insertion slot, and the card reader / writer stores the recorded information read from the prepaid card as a control unit. And the record information of the prepaid card inserted is updated based on a command from the control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the card unit 400 has a card unit connection signal (VL) indicating that the card unit 400 is normally connected to the payout control board 60 (the payout control unit 61) of the slot machine 1. The card unit READY signal (BRDY) indicating the start and end of the lending process by the card unit 400 and the lending request signal (BRQ) requesting the lending of the pachinko ball are output. The card unit connection signal is also a power source for communication between the control unit and the payout control board 60.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 60 (the payout control unit 61) has a slot machine READY signal (SRDY) indicating a state in which the pachinko ball can be lent to the card unit 400, and a pachinko ball based on BRQ. A lending completion signal (EXS) indicating the start and completion of lending operation is output.

  Further, as described above, the remaining amount indicator 28, the ball rental switch 29 and the return switch 30 mounted in the slot machine 1 are connected to the card unit 400, and the remaining amount indicator 28 is output based on the control of the control unit. The detection signal (lending operation detection signal) of the ball lending switch 29 and the detection signal (return operation detection signal) of the return switch 30 are input to the card unit 400. Then, the control unit mounted on the card unit 400 outputs the BRDY described above on condition that the valuable value read from the prepaid card being accepted remains as a result of the ball-lending switch 29 being detected. The above-mentioned BRQ is output, and the processing for requesting the lending unit for lending unit (25 balls in this embodiment) to the slot machine 1 is performed within the range of the remaining valuable value (in this embodiment, 10 times), and when the return switch 30 is detected, the prepaid card being accepted is returned.

  Next, the operation state of the slot machine 1 based on the control of the game control unit 41 and the payout control unit 61 described above will be described based on the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 7 shows that when a winning with payout of a winning ball occurs, when an operation of the checkout switch 10 is detected in a state where a captured ball remains, one or more bets are set and an unused ball is It is a timing chart which shows the operation | movement condition when operation of the start switch 7 is detected in the state which remains.

  When a winning with payout of a winning ball occurs, when an operation of the checkout switch 10 is detected in a state where a captured ball remains, a bet number of 1 or more is set and an unused ball remains When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the game control unit 41 uses the value of the ball number signal to request the payout by the payout request (number of payout requests) or the number of balls to request the payout by the checkout request (settlement) The request number is updated to a value (tb1), and the payout request signal or the settlement request signal is turned on (tb2). Specifically, when a winning accompanied with a payout of a winning ball occurs, the value of the ball number signal is updated to a value indicating the number of winning balls given when the winning is generated, and the payout request signal is set to on. If the operation of the checkout switch 10 is detected in a state where the captured ball remains, that is, a state where a bet number of 1 or more is set or an unused ball remains, the value of the ball signal Is updated to a value indicating the acquired number of balls, which is the sum of the number of used balls and the number of unused balls used to set the number of bets, and the settlement request signal is turned on. Further, when an operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where one or more bets are set and an unused ball remains, the value of the ball number signal is updated to a value indicating the number of unused balls, The settlement request signal is turned on.

  When the payout control unit 61 detects that the payout request signal or the checkout request signal is on, the game control unit 41 is notified of the start of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request or the checkout request by turning on the operation signal (tb3). ). Then, a payout operation for paying out the number of pachinko balls indicated by the ball number signal is started (tb4), and when the payout operation is completed (tb5), the payout operation of the pachinko ball based on the payout request or the settlement request is made with the in-operation signal turned off. Is notified to the game control unit 41 (tb6). Next, when the game control unit 41 detects the off-operation signal, it confirms the end of the payout operation and sets the payout request signal or the settlement request signal to off (tb7). In addition, the game control unit 41 validates the detection of the payout ball by the payout ball detection switch 202 only during the period (tb3 to tb6) from when the on-operation signal is detected to when off is detected. Every time a payout ball is detected, the value of an unpaid ball counter (a counter that stores the number of payout balls that have not been paid out of the number of payout requests based on the payout request) set in the RAM 41c or an unsettled ball counter The value of (the counter that stores the number of unsettled spheres that have not been paid out of the number of settlement requests based on the settlement request) is subtracted and updated.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout rate of the pachinko balls changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery described later is determined according to the set value. Hereinafter, the setting value changing operation will be described.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 detects a voltage drop signal, the power interruption interrupt process is executed. In the power interruption processing, the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and the data for destructive diagnosis (5A (H) in this embodiment) in which any bit becomes 1 in the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41, that is, In addition to storing specific data other than 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41c. ing. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis On the condition that the data value is also correct, the processing state of the CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, but when the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or for destructive diagnosis If the data value is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and a RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error, thereby disabling the progress of the game. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, there are a regular bonus, a small role game in a big bonus, and a normal gaming state as a gaming state. Among these, 1 is defined as the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the regular bonus. The prescribed number of bets corresponding to the small role game and the normal gaming state is set to 3. Therefore, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, the game can be started when 1 is set as the bet number, and when the gaming state is the small role game or the normal gaming state, 3 is set as the bet number. Then, the game can be started. In this embodiment, when a specified number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated, and the specified number corresponding to the gaming state is If it is 1, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated when 1 is set as the bet number, and if the specified number is 3 according to the gaming state, 3 is set as the bet number. All winning lines L1 to L5 are activated.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, if a combination of symbols called “combinations” is arranged on the activated winning line (hereinafter referred to as an effective line), Become. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the game state, but can be broadly divided into small roles with payout of pachinko balls, and the next game can be started without the need to set bets. There are a re-playing role and a special role with a transition of the gaming state. In order for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag for the winning combination.

  Of the winning flags for each of the winning combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the replaying role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set and is cleared at the end of the game. Is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is cleared in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the winning flag for the special role is won, even if the combination of the characters allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not cleared and it is carried over to the next game. Become. However, as will be described later, the combination of JACIN among the special roles will always be aligned with the winning game, so it will not be carried over to the next game, only the winning flags of other special roles will be If the combination of allowed combinations is not complete, it will be carried over to the next game.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a winning combination table by gaming state. The game state winning combination table is stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the game control unit 41 and is used to determine the combination determined to be a winning in the internal lottery. The combination determined according to the game state is shown. In this slot machine 1, JAC, Cherry, and Bell as small roles are replayed as re-playing roles, and special bonuses include a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), a regular bonus (1), and a regular bonus (2 ), JACIN is defined.

  In the regular bonus game state, JAC, cherry, and bell, which are small roles, are determined as winning combinations, and are subject to lottery in the internal lottery in the regular bonus. In the small bonus game described later of Big Bonus, the small bonuses Cherry and Bell, the special bonus Regular Bonus (2), and JACIN are determined as winning roles. It is said. In the normal gaming state, cherry and bell as small roles, replay as replaying roles, big bonus (1), big bonus (2) and regular bonus (1) as special roles are defined as winning roles. In the normal game state, the lottery is a lottery target.

  In the present embodiment, in the regular bonus game state, JAC is determined as a small winning combination in addition to cherry and bell. However, in the regular bonus gaming state, the small bonus game and the normal gaming state Similarly, only the cherry and the bell may be determined as winning small roles.

  JAC wins when the combination of “Replay-Replay-JAC” is aligned on the active line in the regular bonus, but in the gaming state other than the regular bonus, even if this combination is aligned, JAC is not awarded. Cherry is awarded when the symbol “cherry” is derived to any of the active lines for the left reel 2L in any gaming state. A bell is awarded when a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on any of the active lines in any gaming state. The payout of pachinko balls (prize balls) when these small roles win will be described later.

  Replay is awarded when a combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay” is aligned on any of the active lines in the normal gaming state, but this combination is used for regular bonuses and big bonuses (small-games and regular bonuses). Even if it is complete, it will not be a replay prize. When a replay is won, the pachinko ball will not be paid out, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets that need not be set in the next game (the regular bonus will not be replayed with 3) This is substantially the same as the 15 pachinko balls corresponding to the payout.

  The big bonus is awarded when a combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” or a combination of “7-7-7” is arranged on any of the active lines in the normal gaming state. When the big bonus is won, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus. In the big bonus, a game called a small role game can be played. While the gaming state is the big bonus, the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. The big bonus ends when the total number of pachinko balls paid out to the player in the big bonus reaches 2326 balls.

  In addition, when it is necessary to distinguish the big bonus by “BAR-BAR-BAR” and the big bonus by “7-7-7”, they shall be referred to as big bonus (1) and big bonus (2), respectively. . The big bonuses (1) and (2) are further subdivided according to the order in which the winning is determined in the internal lottery. When these are distinguished, the big bonus (1) -A, These are referred to as big bonus (1) -B, big bonus (2) -A, and big bonus (2) -B.

  The regular bonus is awarded when a combination of “7-7-BAR” is arranged on any of the active lines in the small role game and the normal gaming state. When the regular bonus is won, the gaming state shifts from the small role game or the normal gaming state to the regular bonus. The regular bonus ends when 12 games are consumed, or when 8 games are won (any kind of combination is possible), whichever comes first. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. In particular, when a regular bonus is won in the small role game, a regular bonus is provided during the big bonus, and the regular bonus medium flag is also set in the RAM 41c in addition to the big bonus medium flag. When the total number of pachinko balls paid out to the player during the big bonus reaches 2326 with the regular bonus in the big bonus, the regular bonus is terminated together with the big bonus.

  When it is necessary to distinguish between the regular bonus due to “7-7-BAR” in the normal gaming state and the regular bonus due to “7-7-BAR” in the small role game in the big bonus, the regular bonus (1) respectively. This is called regular bonus (2). Further, the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2), the regular bonus (1) and the regular bonus (2) described above may be collectively referred to simply as “bonus”.

  JACIN wins when a combination of “Bell-Bell-JAC” is found on any of the active lines in the small role game, but in a gaming state other than the small role game, even if this combination is available, JACIN wins. Not. When winning JACIN, the above-mentioned regular bonus is provided during the big bonus, and the regular bonus medium flag is also set in the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41 in addition to the big bonus medium flag. When the total number of pachinko balls paid out to the player during the big bonus reaches 2326 with the regular bonus in the big bonus, the regular bonus is terminated together with the big bonus.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the winning of each winning combination is allowed before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). Is. In the internal lottery, first, as will be described later, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state, the acquired internal lottery random number, the bet number set by the player, and the set value set by the reset / setting switch 38 It is performed according to the number of judgment values for the combination. In this embodiment, since the lottery for the small role and the re-playing role and the lottery for the special role are performed separately in the normal gaming state, the winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, Special roles may be won at the same time.

  In the regular bonus and the small bonus game in the big bonus, the reference of the combination according to the gaming state is performed based on the winning combination table according to the gaming state shown in FIG. 9A. It is performed based on both the winning combination table according to gaming state shown in FIG. 9 (a) and the special role combination table described later shown in FIG. 9 (c).

  When the gaming state is a regular bonus (including the case where the bonus is provided during the big bonus), the JAC, cherry, and bell are sequentially read out as target lots for internal lottery by referring to the winning combination table by gaming state. Is in the small bonus game during the big bonus, cherry, bell, regular bonus (2), and JACIN are sequentially read out as the internal lottery target roles. However, when the regular bonus winning flag (2) is set in the game before the previous time and the game is carried over without winning based on the flag, the regular bonus (2) and JACIN are not subject to the internal lottery.

  When in the normal gaming state, first, a lottery of a small combination and a re-playing combination is performed, and then a lottery of a special combination is performed. In the lottery for the small role and the re-playing role, the winning combination table according to the game state is referred to, and the target small role and the re-playing role in the normal gaming state, that is, cherry, bell, and replay are sequentially read out as the targets for the internal lottery .

  In the lottery of special roles, refer to the winning status table for each gaming state and the special role table for the special role. It is read in the order registered in another table.

  In addition, in the lottery for special roles, it is determined whether or not the special role is lost while winning is determined for a plurality of special roles. The roles and special roles are registered in the order in which they are judged. For this reason, in the special role lottery, the special combination and the special combination losing are read out in the order registered in the special-function-specific table.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (c), in the special role-specific table, the special bonuses to be drawn in the normal gaming state include big bonus (1) -A, big bonus (2) -A, big bonus. (1) -B, Big Bonus (2) -B, Regular Bonus (1) are registered and Loss is registered between Big Bonus (2) -A and Big Bonus (1) -B Therefore, in the special role lottery, Big Bonus (1) -A, Big Bonus (2) -A, Loss, Big Bonus (1) -B, Big Bonus (2) -B, Regular Bonus (1) It will be read out.

  However, if the winning flag of the regular bonus (1), big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) is set in the game before the previous time and the game is carried over without winning based on the flag, the regular bonus (1 ) And big bonuses (1) and (2) are not subject to the internal lottery, so the special role lottery itself is not performed.

  In the internal lottery, the number of determination values determined for the internal lottery target combination is sequentially added to the internal lottery random number, and when the addition result overflows, it is determined that the winning combination is won. When the winning is determined, the winning flag of the combination is set in the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41. The number of determination values is read according to the storage address of the number of determination values registered in the role-specific table stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the game control unit 41.

  Also, especially in the normal gaming state, when the number of judgment values determined for the small role and the re-playing role that are the target in the normal gaming state is sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and the result of the addition overflows It is determined that the winning combination has been won, and the winning flag of the winning combination is set.

  Furthermore, regardless of whether or not the result of the addition of the random numbers for internal lottery overflowed, the number of judgment values determined for the special role that is the target in the normal gaming state (the judgment value that was determined in response to the special role lost) Is added to the random number for internal lottery (the first acquired random number) before addition, and when the result of addition overflows, it is determined that the winning combination is won, and the winning flag of the winning combination is determined. Is set (this is not the case when the result of adding the number of judgment values determined corresponding to the special role loses overflows). That is, in the normal gaming state, both the lottery for the small combination and the re-game combination and the lottery for the special combination are performed based on the same random number for internal lottery.

  As described above, if the winning flag of regular bonus (1), big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) is carried over from the previous game to the previous game, There will be no lottery.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram illustrating an example of a role-specific table for a small role and a re-playing role, and FIG. 9C is a diagram illustrating an example of a role-specific table for a special role (and lose). is there. The number of determination values may be 256 or more, and cannot be stored in one byte. Therefore, each determination value number is registered using a storage area of two bytes.

  The number of determination values for each combination (and lose) is registered corresponding to the number of bets (BET) set by the player in the game. This is because even with the same combination, the winning probability in the regular bonus may differ from other combinations. In addition, the number of determination values corresponding to the number of bets for each combination (and lose) is common regardless of the set value, and is different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  In the role-specific table for the small role and the re-playing role, as shown in FIG. 9B, the storage addresses of the judgment value numbers of JAC, cherry, bell, and replay are registered in the order in which they are referenced.

  The JAC is a role that is subject to internal lottery only with the regular bonus, and the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 1 with the regular bonus is registered. The common flag of this combination is 0, and the storage address of the judgment value number is registered individually according to the set value corresponding to each bet number.

  Cherry and Bell are the targets that are subject to internal lottery in any gaming state, the storage address of the number of judgment values corresponding to the number of bets 1 in the regular bonus, and the number of bets 3 in the normal gaming state or small role game And the storage address of the number of judgment values corresponding to. For cherry, the common flag is 1, and the storage address of the common number of determination values is registered corresponding to the number of bets regardless of the set value. For the bell, the common flag is 0, and the storage address of the number of determination values is individually registered according to the set value corresponding to each bet number.

  Replay is a role that is subject to internal lottery only in the normal gaming state, and a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 3 in the normal gaming state is registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, the special role (and loser) role-specific table includes big bonus (1) -A, big bonus (2) -A, lose, big bonus (1) -B, The storage addresses for the number of determination values for each combination are registered in the order of big bonus (2) -B, regular bonus (1), regular bonus (2), and JACIN.

  The big bonus (1) -A and the big bonus (2) -A are roles that are subject to internal lottery only in the normal gaming state, and the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 3 in the normal gaming state is Each is registered. For these combinations, the value of the common flag is 1, and the storage address of the common determination value number is registered regardless of the set value.

  Loss, Big Bonus (1) -B, Big Bonus (2) -B, Regular Bonus (1) are only eligible for internal lottery only in the normal gaming state and correspond to 3 bets in the normal gaming state. The storage addresses for the number of judgment values to be registered are registered. For these combinations, the value of the common flag is 0, and the storage address of the number of determination values is individually registered according to the set value.

  Regular bonus (2) and JACIN are internal lottery targets only in the small bonus game in the big bonus, and the storage address of the number of judgment values corresponding to the bet number 3 in the small bonus game is registered. . The value of the common flag for this role is 1, and a storage address for a common number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  In addition, the number of pachinko balls to be paid out when winning each winning combination is also registered in the role-specific table. However, only the JAC, Cherry, and Bell, which are small roles, can be paid out for the pachinko balls (prize balls) when winning. Cherry and bell can be awarded when the bet number is 1 (regular bonus) or 3 (game state other than the regular bonus), but for the bell, when the bet number is 1, that is, the game When the state is a regular bonus, 75 pachinko balls, which are more than the other 35 balls, are paid out.

  The big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the regular bonus (1), the regular bonus (2), and the winning of JACIN are accompanied by a transition of the gaming state, and are not eligible for payout of pachinko balls. In replay, there is no payout of pachinko balls, but since there is no need for pachinko balls to be used for setting the number of bets in the next game, it is substantially the same as payout of 15 balls. Also, of course, the loss of special roles will not be paid out for pachinko balls.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a storage area for the number of determination values acquired based on addresses registered in the role-specific table. The storage area for the number of determination values is provided in the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41 in the development model, and in the address area allocated to the ROM 41b in the game control unit 41 in the mass production model.

  For example, the addresses ADD + 40, ADD + 42, ADD + 44, ADD + 94, and ADD + 96 are set when the internal lottery target is replay, big bonus (1) -A, big bonus (2) -A, regular bonus (2), JACIN, respectively. The addresses are referenced regardless of the value, and 8978, 27, 57, 85, and 23500 are acquired as the number of determination values, respectively, regardless of the set value.

  The address ADD is an address that is referred to when the target role of the internal lottery is JAC and the setting value is 1, and at this time, 51, which is a value stored here, is acquired as the number of determination values. Addresses ADD + 2, ADD + 4, ADD + 6, ADD + 8, and ADD + 10 are addresses that are referred to when the target role of the internal lottery is JAC and the set value is 2 to 6, respectively. For JAC, the same values are registered in addresses ADD, ADD + 2, ADD + 4 and ADD + 6, and ADD + 8 and ADD + 10. Therefore, the winning probabilities of JACs with setting values 1 to 4, setting values 5 and 6 are set. Are the same.

  The addresses ADD + 82, ADD + 84, ADD + 86, ADD + 88, ADD + 90, and ADD + 92 are addresses that are referred to when the internal lottery target is the regular bonus (1) and the set value is 1 to 6, respectively. As for regular bonus (1), the number of judgment values is individually stored according to the set value, but since the same number of judgment values is stored, the winning of regular bonus (1) at any set value Probabilities are the same.

  Addresses ADD + 58, ADD + 60, ADD + 62, ADD + 64, ADD + 66, and ADD + 68 are addresses that are referenced when the internal lottery target is the big bonus (1) -B and the set value is 1-6. Addresses ADD + 70, ADD + 72, ADD + 74, ADD + 76, ADD + 78, and ADD + 80 are addresses that are referenced when the internal lottery target is a big bonus (2) -B and the set value is 1-6. For the big bonuses (1) -B and (2) -B, the number of determination values is individually stored according to the set value, and different determination value numbers are stored. The winning probabilities of 1) -B and (2) -B will be different.

  The address ADD + 12 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the bet number is 1, that is, when the target character of the internal lottery is cherry in the regular bonus. The address ADD + 14 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the bet number is 3, that is, when the target lot of the internal lottery is cherry in the normal gaming state or the small role game. Since different values are registered for the number of cherries according to the number of bets, the winning probability of cherries differs according to the number of bets.

  Addresses ADD + 16, ADD + 18, ADD + 20, ADD + 22, ADD + 24, and ADD + 26 are addresses that are referenced when the bet number is 1, that is, when the target character of the internal lottery is a bell and the set value is 1 to 6 in the regular bonus. is there. Since the same values are registered in the addresses ADD + 16, ADD + 18, ADD + 20 and ADD + 22, and ADD + 24 and ADD + 26, respectively, at the regular bonus, the set values 1 to 4, the set values 5 and 6 are Winning probability is the same.

  Addresses ADD + 28, ADD + 30, ADD + 32, ADD + 34, ADD + 36, and ADD + 38 are each when the number of bets is 3, that is, when the target lot of the internal lottery is a bell and the set value is 1 to 6 in the normal game state or the small role game The address to be referenced. Since the same values are registered in the addresses ADD + 28, ADD + 30, ADD + 32 and ADD + 34, and ADD + 36 and ADD + 38, respectively, in the normal game state or the small role game, the set values 1 to 4, the set value 5 and the set value 6 Thus, the winning probability of Bell is the same.

  Addresses ADD + 46, ADD + 48, ADD + 50, ADD + 52, ADD + 54, and ADD + 56 are addresses that are referred to when the target combination of the internal lottery is lost and the set value is 1 to 6, respectively. Since the same value is registered in each of the addresses ADD + 46, ADD + 48, ADD + 50, and ADD + 52, and ADD + 54 and ADD + 56, the winning probability of the loss is the same in the setting values 1 to 4, the setting value 5 and the setting value 6. .

  FIGS. 11A, 11B, 12A, and 13B are diagrams showing an example of the relationship between the value of the random number for internal lottery and the number of determination values of each combination and the winning combination. . FIGS. 11A, 11B, and 12 show an example in the normal gaming state, FIG. 13A shows an example in a small role game, and FIG. 13B shows an example in a regular bonus. Yes. 11 (a), (b), FIG. 12, FIG. 13 (a), and (b) show examples where the set value is 6, and FIG. 11 (b) and FIG. An example in which neither a bonus nor a big bonus winning flag is set is shown.

  In the normal gaming state, the roles that are subject to the internal lottery are regular bonus (1), big bonus (1), big bonus (2), cherry, bell, and replay, but as described above, in the normal gaming state Since the lottery for the small role and the re-playing role and the lottery for the special role are performed separately for the same random number for the internal lottery, here, the random value for the internal lottery in the lottery for the small role and the re-playing role and For the internal lottery based on the relationship between the number of judgment values for each role and the winning role, the random value for internal lottery in the lottery for special roles, the relationship between the number of judgment values for each role and the winning role, and the combination of both lotteries The relationship between the value of the random number and the number of determination values for each combination and the winning combination will be described.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), the winning roles in the lottery of the small role and the replaying role in the normal gaming state are cherry, bell, and replay. Becomes 655, 13600, and 8978. When the cherry that is the target of the lottery of the small combination and the re-game combination is added as a random number for internal lottery, the addition result overflows by adding 655 of the judgment value Will be won.

  Next, the bell that is the subject of the lottery for the small role and the re-playing role adds 14255, which is the sum of the cherry judgment value number 655 and the bell judgment value number 13600, and the addition result overflows 51281. Wins when ˜64880 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. Similarly, the replay is determined to be a win when 42303 to 51280 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery.

  The approximate winning probabilities of the small combination and re-playing combination calculated based on the number of determination values are 1 / 100.06, 1 / 4.82, 1 / 7.30 for cherry, bell, and replay, respectively. It becomes. When 0 to 42302 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all the small combinations and re-playing combinations are lost.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), the winning combinations in the special game lottery in the normal gaming state are Big Bonus (1) -A, Big Bonus (2) -A, Loss, Big Bonus (1) -B, Big Bonus (2) -B, Regular Bonus (1). With the set value 6, the number of determination values is 27, 57, 23149, 54, 113, 84, so 65509 to 65535 65, 4552 to 65508, 42303 to 65451, 42249 to 42302, 42136 to 42248, and 422052 to 42135 are determined as random numbers for internal lottery, it is determined that the winning combination (special role is lost). In addition, the approximate winning probabilities of the respective combinations are 1 / 2427.26, 1 / 1149.75, 1 / 2.83, 1 / 1121.63, 1 / 579.96, and 1 / 780.19. Note that when 0 to 42051 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all special roles are lost.

  Then, a random number range (64881 to 65535) for the internal lottery in which the cherry is determined to be won in the lottery of the small role and the replaying role, and the big bonus (1) -A and the big bonus (2)-in the special lottery Since the range of random numbers for internal lottery (65509 to 65535, 65452 to 65508) in which A is determined to be winning overlap, when the values of these overlapping ranges are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, It is determined that 1) and cherry, and big bonus (2) and cherry are won at the same time.

  Therefore, in the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 12, when 65509 to 65535 and 65452 to 65508 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, big bonus (1), cherry, big bonus (2) and When it is determined that cherries were won at the same time and 64881 to 65451 were acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, it was determined that only cherries were won by themselves, and 51281 to 64880 were acquired as random numbers for internal lottery On the other hand, when it is determined that only the bell has been won alone and 42303 to 51280 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, it is determined that only replay has been won alone, and 42249 to 42302 are used as random numbers for internal lottery. When acquired, it is determined that only the big bonus (1) has been won, 4213 When ~ 42248 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, it is determined that only the big bonus (2) has been won, and when 42052-42135 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, a regular bonus (1 Only) will be determined to have won.

  And the approximate probability of winning big bonus (1) and cherry at the same time is 1 / 2427.26, the approximate probability of winning big bonus (2) and cherry at the same time is 1 / 1149.75, and cherry wins alone. The approximate probability of winning is 1 / 1114.77, and the approximate probability of winning the bell, replay, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), and regular bonus (1) alone is 1 / 4.82, 1 /7.30, 1 / 1213.63, 1 / 579.96, 1 / 780.19. In addition, when 0 to 42051 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the small role and the re-playing role and the address value registered in the role-specific table for the special role are stored. From the determined number of judgment values, it is possible to specify the range of judgment values that each of the small role, replaying role, and special role wins independently, and the range of judgment values that the small role and special role will win In the internal lottery, the value obtained as a random number for internal lottery is included in the range of judgment values that each of the small role, replaying role, and special role specified by the number of judgment values wins independently. If it is determined that the small role, the replaying role, and the special role are each elected alone, and if the small role and the special role are included in the range of determination values to be won, the small role and the special role Both of them are judged to have won.

  In the normal gaming state, when either the regular bonus or the big bonus winning flag is already set, that is, when these winning flags are set in the previous game and carried over, In addition, since only lottery of re-playing roles is performed, the random number value that determines each winning combination and the winning probability of each winning combination are as shown in FIG.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13A, in the small role game, cherry, bell, regular bonus (2), and JACIN are subject to internal lottery, and the number of determination values is 655, 13600, 85, and 23500, respectively. Therefore, when 64881 to 65535, 51281 to 64880, 51196 to 51280, and 27696 to 51195 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, it is determined that the winning is made. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities of the respective roles are 1 / 100.06, 1 / 4.82, 1 / 771.01, and 1 / 2.79. When 0 to 27695 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, in the regular bonus, JAC, cherry, and bell are subject to internal lottery, and the numbers of determination values are 51278, 656, and 13601, so 14258 to 65535 and 13602. When 14257 and 1-13601 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, it is determined that the winner is won. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities for each combination are 1 / 1.28, 1 / 99.90, and 1 / 4.82. When 0 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  Next, acquisition of random numbers for internal lottery will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The random numbers for the internal lottery are acquired by extracting random numbers from the random number generation circuit 42 by the hardware random number function and processing them by software by the CPU 41a. Note that the least significant bit of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 or the processed random number is called the 0th bit, and the most significant bit is called the 15th bit.

  FIG. 14A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the random number generation circuit 42 in detail. As shown in the figure, the random number generation circuit 42 includes a pulse generation circuit 42a, a lower counter 42b, and an upper counter 42c. Each of the lower counter 42b and the upper counter 42c is an 8-bit (1 byte) counter, the lower counter 42b is the 0th to 7th bits, and the upper counter 42c is a total of 16 bits from the 8th to 15th bits. The data signal is output.

  The pulse generation circuit 42a outputs a pulse signal at a frequency (preferably relatively prime) that is higher than the frequency of the operation clock of the CPU 41a and is not an integral multiple thereof. The pulse signal output from the pulse generation circuit 42a is clocked into the lower counter 42b.

  The lower counter 42b alternately inverts the 0th bit data signal between the H level and the L level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit 42a. Assuming that positive logic is applied, a logical value of H level corresponds to 1 and a logical value of L level corresponds to 0. In the case of negative logic, a logic value of 1 may be read as L level, and a logic value of 0 may be read as H level. When the level of the 0th bit data signal is inverted from H level to L level, that is, whenever the logic value of the 0th bit data signal changes from 1 to 0, the level of the 1st bit data signal is changed to H level. Inverted alternately with L level.

  Similarly, when the level of the (m−1) th bit data signal is inverted from the H level to the L level, that is, whenever the logic value of the (m−1) th bit data signal changes from 1 to 0, the mth bit data The signal level is alternately inverted between the H level and the L level. The carry signal is output every time the level of the seventh bit data signal changes from H level, that is, the logical value of the seventh bit data signal changes from 1 to 0. The carry signal output from the lower counter 42b is clocked into the upper counter 42c.

  The upper counter 42c alternately inverts the eighth bit data signal between the H level and the L level every time a carry signal is input from the lower counter 42b. Each time the level of the 9th bit data signal is inverted from H level to L level, the level of the 9th bit data signal is alternately inverted between H level and L level. Similarly, every time the level of the m−1th bit data signal is inverted from the H level to the L level, the level of the mth bit data signal is alternately inverted between the H level and the L level.

  The logic value of a 16-bit data signal in which the data signal of the lower counter 42b is the lower 8 bits and the data signal of the upper counter 42c is the upper 8 bits is 0 (0000h) every time the pulse generation circuit 42a outputs the pulse signal. ) → 1 (0001h) → 2 (0002h) →... → 65535 (FFFFh) The values are updated so as to be continuous every update, and the maximum value 65535 (FFFFh) is next to the initial value 0 (0000h). The value circulates and is output from the random number generation circuit 42.

  The sampling circuit 43 includes a latch circuit, and latches and latches a 16-bit data signal output from the random number generation circuit 42 at that time based on a sampling command (when the start switch 7 is operated) from the CPU 41a. Output the data signal. The CPU 41a extracts numerical data corresponding to the data signal input from the sampling circuit 43 via the I / O port 41d as a random number generated by the random number generation circuit. In the following description, the data signal output from the random number generation circuit 42 is described as a random number corresponding to the logical value.

  FIG. 14B is an explanatory diagram until the CPU 41a processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 into a random number for internal lottery by software. The random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in a 16-bit general-purpose register 41GR included in the CPU 41a.

  When the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41GR, the CPU 41a uses the other general-purpose register or the work area of the RAM 41c to lower-order the bytes of the general-purpose register 41GR (value extracted from the lower-order counter 42b). And the value of the upper byte (the value extracted from the upper counter 42c) are exchanged. Then, the CPU 41a acquires the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR at this time as a random number for internal lottery, stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and sequentially adds the number of determination values of each combination to this. It will be going.

  Note that interrupts to the CPU 41a are prohibited from the extraction of random numbers from the random number generation circuit 42 to the end of processing. This is to prevent the contents of the general-purpose register 41GR from being rewritten in the interrupt processing routine when an interrupt is generated to the CPU 41a.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  The CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the table index stores the start address of the area in which the data for creating the table is stored for each game state according to the winning status of the combination. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, cherry, bell, replay, big bonus (1) (+ lose), big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (1) + bell, big bonus (1) + replay Big Bonus (2) (+ Loss), Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Bell, Big Bonus (2) + Replay, Regular Bonus (1) (+ Loss), Regular Bonus (1) For each of + Cherry, Regular Bonus (1) + Bell, Regular Bonus (1) + Replay, Loss, the top address of the area where the data for table creation is stored is stored. Cherry, Bell, JACIN, Regular Bonus (2) (+ Loss), Regular Bona (2) + Cherry, Regular Bonus (2) + For each of Bell and Loss, the top address of the area where the data for table creation is stored is stored. For Regular Bonus, each of Cherry, Bell, JAC and Loss The head address of the area where the table creation data is stored is stored. In addition, even when the gaming state is different or the winning situation of the combination is different, the same control is applied (for example, the same in the cherry winning in the small role game and in the cherry winning in the regular bonus) When applying control, or when applying the same control for Big Bonus (1) + Replay Winning, Big Bonus (2) + Replay Winning, Regular Bonus (1) + Replay Winning, etc.) In this case, the same address is stored as the start address of the area where the table creation data is stored. In such a case, the stop control table is created by referring to the same table creation data. It will be.

  The table creation data is composed of drawn-in frame number data indicating the number of drawn-in frames corresponding to the stop operation position, and an address of drawn-in frame number data to be referred to in accordance with the reel stop status.

  The number-of-drawing frame data referenced according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, or left Depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and in the situation where any one of the reels is stopped, Since it may differ depending on the stop position of the stopped reel (in this embodiment, the stop operation position of the stopped reel), the address of the drawing frame number data to be referred to for each of these situations is the rotating reel. It is registered separately, and based on the top address of the table creation data, it is possible to specify the address of the number of frames data to be referred to according to each situation, From a particular address, and to be able to identify the attraction frame number data required for each situation. Even if the reel stop status and the stopped position (stop operation position) of the reel that has been stopped are different, the same address is registered as the address of the drawn frame number data when the same number of drawn frame data is applied. In such a case, the same data for the number of drawn frames is referred to.

  The drawn frame number data is data that can specify the number of drawn frames for each timing at which the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. As shown in FIG. 16, 42 regions (frames) divided every four steps are defined for one reel, and these regions have region numbers 1 to 42 from the reel reference position. Assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 are assigned to the symbols of each reel from the reel reference position. Each of the area numbers 1 to 42 is assigned in order of two. The number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule in the number of drawn frames data so that the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the number of drawn frames data. It has become.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data as described above corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number corresponds to the stop reference position (this In the embodiment, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are positioned at the timing (the timing at which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number) positioned in the lower half region in the lower design of the see-through window 3. This is a table in which the number of frames to be drawn in when the above operation is detected is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the game state of the game and the winning status of the combination is acquired. Then, the table creation data is specified based on the acquired head address, and the address of the number of frames to be drawn for each reel corresponding to the state in which all the reels are rotating is acquired from the specified table creation data, and the acquired address The drawing frame number data of each reel stored in is developed and a stop control table is created for all reels.

  Also, when any one reel stops or when any two reels stop, the table creation data corresponding to the start address acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the game state of the game and the winning status of the combination The table creation data is specified based on the head address of the table, and the stopped reels are drawn from the identified table creation data and the unstopped reels corresponding to the area number (stop operation position) where the stop operation of the reels is performed. The address of the frame number data is acquired, the drawing frame number data of each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded, and a stop control table is created for the unstopped reel.

  Next, when the CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control for deriving the display result to the corresponding reel will be described. If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, an area (stop point in the figure) corresponding to the area number corresponding to the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn in from the area (stop operation point in the figure) corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. It will stop at the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the lower half region in the lower symbol of the see-through window 3).

  Further, the table index of this embodiment stores only one address as the top address of the table creation data storage area corresponding to the winning situation of one role in one gaming state. In the table creation data, only one address is stored as the address of the storage area for the number of drawn frame data corresponding to the stop status of one reel (and the stop operation position of the stopped reel). That is, the table creation data corresponding to the winning status of each combination for each gaming state, and the number-of-drawing frame data corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop operation position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to these is also unique for the winning combination status and the reel stop status (and the stop operation position of the stopped reel) for each gaming state. For this reason, when all of the gaming state, winning combination status, and reel stop status (and stop operation position of a stopped reel) are the same, the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern is used. Thus, reel stop control is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 9 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and it is possible to stop the reel by drawing a maximum of nine symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to 10 frames including the stop operation position at which the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move two frames to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In this embodiment, when an area with an odd area number is stopped at the reference stop position, the design will stop with a half frame shift from the winning line. In order for the area to stop at the reference stop position, an odd number is always set for the number of drawn frames corresponding to an odd area number, and an even number is always set for the number of drawn frames corresponding to an even area number. It has been established. That is, as the number of frames to be drawn corresponding to each area number, a value at which the symbol always stops at the upper, middle, and lower positions of the see-through window 3 is determined.

  In addition, the table index stores the address of the data for table creation in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the combination of the winning combinations is drawn to the maximum within the range of 9 frames when any of the roles is won. If no winning combination is won, an address of data for table creation in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that no combination of any winning combinations is stored. For this reason, when any of the winning combinations is won, a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the combination of winning combinations is drawn within a range of 9 frames is created, and the reel stop control is performed. On the other hand, if none of the winning combinations is won, a stop control table in which the number of drawn frames that do not have any combination of the winning combinations is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line within the draw range of 9 frames, the control is performed to align and stop the winning combination. The symbol of the role that is not performed is controlled to be stopped in a 9-frame pull-in range.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 8, “bell”, “replay”, and “JAC” are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within 10 frames, for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It can be stopped at any position within the 9-frame pull-in range. In other words, when the winning flags of bell, replay, JAC, and JACIN are set, the winning combination can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player.

  Next, the chance eyes will be described. In this embodiment, a chance is a case where any bonus (Big Bonus (1) (2), Regular Bonus (1)) is won in the normal gaming state, and no role is won. In this embodiment, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”, “watermelon-watermelon-7” and “watermelon-watermelon-BAR” are displayed on the winning line. Apply as eyes. In the present embodiment, since the chance is not determined as a role, it does not involve the payout of a pachinko ball or the transition of the game state.

  Also, in this embodiment, when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and no other combination is won, and when no combination is won in the normal gaming state, It is possible to stop on condition that each reel has been stopped in the middle and right order, and control is performed so that chances are not derived when stop operations are performed in other order. Is done.

  Here, the reel stop control when deriving the chance is described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 16 to 18 show that when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and the other combination is not won (Big Bonus (1) + Loss, Big Bonus (2) + Loss, Regular Bonus) It is a figure which shows the stop control table created when (1) + losing) and any combination is not won (losing).

  First, in a case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), a stop control table corresponding to the item of losing in FIG. 16 is created as a stop control table for the left reel at the start of reel rotation. Is done. In this stop control table, 0 and 1 are determined as the number of frames to be drawn in the area numbers 16 and 17, respectively. When a stop operation of the left reel is detected at these timings, the number 8 “watermelon” The symbol stops at the bottom. In addition, 0 to 5 are determined as the number of frames to be drawn in the area numbers 18 to 23, respectively, and when the left reel stop operation is detected at these timings, the “Watermelon” symbol of No. 8 stops in the middle. To do. In the normal gaming state, when neither of the winning combinations is won (losing), the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 16 and 17, and the “Watermelon” symbol of No. 8 is displayed at the bottom. When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 18 to 23, the “Watermelon” symbol of No. 8 stops in the middle stage, but among these, the left reel at the timing of the area number 17 No. 8 “Watermelon” symbol stops at the lower stage by detecting the stop operation of No. 8, or No. 8 “Watermelon” by detecting the stop operation of the left reel at the timing of the area numbers 19, 21, 23 On the condition that the symbol has stopped in the middle, a stop control table capable of finally stopping the chance eye is created as a stop control table for the middle and right reels. Even if the “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower or middle level, if it stops when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 16, 18, 20, and 22, the final chance Never stop. In this embodiment, when a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timings of the area numbers 16, 18, 20, and 22, a stop control table in which the “watermelon” symbol does not stop as a middle reel stop control table. However, for example, a stop control table in which the “watermelon” symbol stops at the middle stage is created as a middle reel stop control table. When the “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle, the “watermelon” symbol “BAR” “7” symbol does not stop on the winning line where the “watermelon” symbol is tempered as a stop control table for the right reel By creating it, it is possible to finally prevent the chance eye from stopping.

  Next, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the region numbers 17, 19, 21, and 23, when the eighth “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower or middle stage of the left reel, the middle reel stop control is performed. As the table, a stop control table corresponding to the items of the lost and left region numbers 17, 19, 21, and 23 in FIG. 17 is created. In this stop control table, when a stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timings of the area numbers 4 and 5, the “watermelon” symbol of No. 1 stops at the middle stage, and at the timing of the area numbers 12 and 13, the middle reel When a stop operation is detected, the “Watermelon” symbol of No. 5 stops in the middle stage, and when a stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 20, 21, and 23, the “Watermelon” of No. 9 When the symbol stops in the middle stage and the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 34 to 37, the “watermelon” symbol of No. 16 stops at the middle stage and at the timing of the area numbers 38, 39, and 41. When the stop operation of the middle reel is detected, the 18th “watermelon” symbol stops at the middle stage. If none of the roles is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the middle reel stop operation is detected by detecting the middle reel stop operation at the timing of area number 23. As a stop control table for the right reel, the stop control table for the right reel is finally obtained on condition that the “watermelon” symbol No. 18 has stopped in the middle stage when the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of area number 41. A stop control table capable of stopping chances is created, and even if the “Watermelon” symbol of No. 9 or the “Watermelon” of No. 18 stops in the middle, the region numbers 23 and 41 If a stop operation is detected when a middle reel stop operation is detected at a time other than the above timing, the winning reel with the “watermelon” symbol is used as the stop control table for the right reel. Symbol "watermelon", "BAR", "7" is not stopped on the emissions are adapted to stop control table is created, ultimately chances eyes will not be stopped.

  Next, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 17, the “watermelon” symbol of No. 8 stops at the lower stage of the left reel, and the stop operation of the middle reel at the timing of the area number 23 or 41 Is detected, the 9th or 18th “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle stage of the middle reel, and the “watermelon” symbol is tempered on the left, middle reel winning line L5 (winning line L5). If any of the symbols “watermelon”, “BAR”, and “7” stops, there is a chance to stop), the stop control table on the left side of FIG. Loss, left-middle area numbers 17-23, 17-41, BB (1) (2) Loss, RB loss, left-middle stop symbol: A stop control table corresponding to the item of the watermelon rising upward template is created. . In this stop control table, when the stop operation of the right reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 2 to 9, the “watermelon” symbol of No. 20 stops at the upper stage, and at the timing of the area numbers 10 to 19 When the stop operation is detected, the “Watermelon” symbol of No. 3 stops at the upper stage, and when the stop operation of the right reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 20 to 25, the “BAR” symbol of No. 7 is When the stop operation of the right reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 26 to 35, the 11th “watermelon” symbol stops at the upper stage, and the right reel at the timing of the area numbers 36 to 42, 1 When the stop operation is detected, the “7” symbol of No. 16 stops in the upper stage. That is, in this stop control table, the symbol “watermelon”, “BAR”, or “7” always stops at the upper stage of the right reel regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the right reel.

  In addition, the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 19, 21, 23, the “watermelon” symbol of No. 8 stops in the middle stage of the left reel, and the stop of the middle reel at the timing of the area numbers 23 or 41 When the operation is detected, the 9th or 18th “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle stage of the middle reel, and the “watermelon” symbol is on the left, middle reel winning line L1 (winning line) When one of the symbols “watermelon”, “BAR”, and “7” stops on L1, there is a chance, the stop control table on the right side of FIG. That is, lose, left-middle area numbers 19, 21, 23-23, 19, 21, 23-41, BB (1) (2) lose, RB lose, left-middle stop symbol: corresponding to the item of watermelon middle stage pie Stop Your table is created. In this stop control table, when the stop operation of the right reel is detected at the timings of the region numbers 24 to 33, the “watermelon” symbol of No. 11 stops in the middle. That is, in this stop control table, “watermelon” stops at the middle stage of the right reel on condition that the stop operation of the right reel is performed at a timing at which the No. 11 “watermelon” symbol can be drawn, and at other timings , “Watermelon”, “BAR” or “7” does not stop in the middle.

  Next, when the big bonus (1) is won in the normal gaming state and the other combination is not won (big bonus (1) + lose), the left reel is stopped at the start of the reel rotation. As the control table, a stop control table corresponding to the item BB (1) loss in FIG. 16 is created. In this stop control table, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 16 and 17, the “Watermelon” symbol of No. 8 stops at the lower stage, and the timing of the left reel at the timing of the area numbers 18 to 27 When a stop operation is detected, the 8th “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle. In the normal gaming state, when the big bonus (1) is won and the other combination is not won (big bonus (1) + lose), the left reel is stopped at the timing of area numbers 16 to 23. Is detected, the No. 8 “Watermelon” symbol stops at the lower or middle stage, and among these, the No. 8 “Watermelon” symbol is displayed regardless of the timing of the left reel. Stop control that can finally stop the chance as a stop control table for the middle and right reels, provided that the symbol stops at the lower stage or the No. 8 "watermelon" symbol stops at the middle stage A table is created.

  Next, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 16 and 17, when the “watermelon” symbol of No. 8 stops at the lower stage of the left reel, the stop control table of FIG. A stop control table corresponding to the items of BB (1) loss and left region numbers 16 and 17 is created. In this stop control table, when the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 4 to 7, the first “watermelon” symbol stops at the middle stage, and the timing of the middle reel is reached at the timing of the area numbers 26 to 29. When the stop operation is detected, the 9th “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle, and when the middle reel stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 34 to 37, the 16th “watermelon” symbol is displayed. When a middle reel stop operation is detected at the timing of area numbers 38 to 42 and 1 to 3, the 18th “watermelon” symbol stops at the middle stage. When the big bonus (1) is won in the normal gaming state and the other combination is not won (big bonus (1) + losing), the region numbers 4-7, 26-29, 34-42 When the middle reel stop operation is detected at the timings 1 to 3, the “watermelon” symbol is stopped at the middle stage, and it is related to which region number timing of the middle reel stop operation is detected. First, on the condition that the “watermelon” symbol has stopped in the middle, a stop control table capable of finally stopping the chance eye is created as the stop control table for the right reel.

  Further, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 18 to 27, when the “watermelon” symbol of No. 8 stops in the middle stage of the left reel, the stop control table of FIG. A stop control table corresponding to the items of BB (1) loss and left region numbers 18 to 27 is created. In this stop control table, when a stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 4 to 7, the “watermelon” symbol of No. 1 stops at the middle stage, and the timing of the middle reel is reached at the timing of the area numbers 28 and 29. When the stop operation is detected, the 9th “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle, and when the middle reel stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 34 to 37, the 16th “watermelon” symbol is displayed. When a middle reel stop operation is detected at the timing of area numbers 38 to 42 and 1 to 3, the 18th “watermelon” symbol stops at the middle stage. In the normal gaming state, when the big bonus (1) is won and the other combination is not won (big bonus (1) + losing), the area numbers 4-7, 28, 29, 34-42 When the middle reel stop operation is detected at the timings 1 to 3, the “watermelon” symbol is stopped at the middle stage, and it is related to which region number timing of the middle reel stop operation is detected. First, on the condition that the “watermelon” symbol has stopped in the middle, a stop control table capable of finally stopping the chance eye is created as the stop control table for the right reel.

  Next, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the region numbers 16 and 17, the “Watermelon” symbol of No. 8 is stopped at the lower stage of the left reel, and 4 to 7, 26 to 29, and 34 to 42 are stopped. When the middle reel stop operation is detected at the timings 1 to 3, the “watermelon” symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel, and the “watermelon” symbol appears on the left, middle reel winning line L5. (If any of the symbols “Watermelon”, “BAR”, and “7” stops on the winning line L5 is a chance), the left reel of FIG. 18 is used as a stop control table for the right reel. Stop control table, ie, lost, left-middle region numbers 17-23, 17-41, BB (1) (2) lost, RB lost, left-middle stop symbol: stop control corresponding to the item of watermelon rising to the right Table created It is. In the stop control table, as described above, the symbol “watermelon”, “BAR”, or “7” always stops at the upper stage of the right reel regardless of the timing of the right reel stop operation.

  In addition, the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 18 to 27, the “Watermelon” symbol of No. 8 stops in the middle stage of the left reel, and the area numbers 4 to 7, 28, 29, 34 to 42, When the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of 1 to 3, the “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle stage of the middle reel, and the “watermelon” symbol is tempered on the left, middle reel winning line L1. Time (when any of the symbols "Watermelon", "BAR", and "7" stops on the winning line L1 is a chance), the right reel of FIG. Stop control table, that is, lost, left-middle region numbers 19, 21, 23-23, 19, 21, 23-41, BB (1) (2) lost, RB lost, left-middle stop Stop corresponding to the item Your table is created. In this stop control table, “watermelon” stops in the middle of the right reel, provided that the stop operation of the right reel is performed at the timing at which the 11th “watermelon” symbol can be pulled in as described above. At this timing, any of the symbols “watermelon”, “BAR” or “7” does not stop at the middle stage.

  Next, in the normal gaming state, when the big bonus (2) or the regular bonus (1) is won and the other role is not won (the big bonus (2) + losing or the regular bonus (1) + At the time of the start of reel rotation, a stop control table corresponding to the items BB (2) loss and RB loss in FIG. 16 is created as the stop control table for the left reel. In this stop control table, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 22 to 25, the “Watermelon” symbol of No. 8 stops at the lower stage, and the timing of the left reel at the timing of the area numbers 26 and 27 When a stop operation is detected, the 8th “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle. In the normal gaming state, if you win the Big Bonus (2) or Regular Bonus (1) and you have not won any other role (Big Bonus (2) + Loss or Regular Bonus (1) + Loss) When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 22 to 27, the “Watermelon” symbol of No. 8 stops at the lower or middle stage, and among these, the stop of the left reel is performed at the timing of which area number Regardless of whether or not an operation has been detected, the stop control table for the middle and right reels, on condition that the number 8 “watermelon” symbol stops at the bottom or the number 8 “watermelon” symbol stops at the middle, A stop control table capable of finally stopping the chance is created.

  Next, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 22 to 27, when the “watermelon” symbol of No. 8 stops at the lower or middle stage of the left reel, A stop control table corresponding to the items of 17 BB (1) loss, RB loss, and left region numbers 22 to 27 is created. In the stop control table, when the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 4 to 11, the “watermelon” symbol of No. 1 stops at the middle stage, and the timing of the middle reel at the timing of the area numbers 12 to 19 When a stop operation is detected, the “Watermelon” symbol of No. 5 stops in the middle stage, and when a stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 20 to 29, the “Watermelon” symbol of No. 9 is displayed. When the middle reel stops and the middle reel stop operation is detected at the timing of area numbers 34 to 37, the 16th “watermelon” symbol stops at the middle stage and at the timing of area numbers 38 to 42, 1 to 3. When the stop operation of the middle reel is detected, the 18th “watermelon” symbol stops at the middle stage. In the normal gaming state, if you win the Big Bonus (2) or Regular Bonus (1) and you have not won any other role (Big Bonus (2) + Loss, Regular Bonus (1) + Loss) , When the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 4 to 29, 34 to 42, 1 to 3, that is, the timings other than the area numbers 30 to 33, the “watermelon” symbol stops at the middle stage. Regardless of the region number timing at which the middle reel stop operation is detected, the chances of the right reel as a stop control table are finally determined on the condition that the “watermelon” symbol has stopped in the middle. A stop control table that can be stopped is created.

  Next, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 22 to 25, the “Watermelon” symbol of No. 8 stops at the lower stage of the left reel, and the middle reel at a timing other than the area numbers 30 to 33 Is detected, the “watermelon” symbol is stopped at the middle stage of the middle reel, and the “watermelon” symbol is tempered on the winning line L5 of the left and middle reels (“ When any of the symbols “watermelon”, “BAR”, and “7” stops, it becomes a chance)), the stop control table on the left side of FIG. -Middle area numbers 17-23, 17-41, BB (1) (2) Loss, RB loss, left-middle stop symbol: A stop control table corresponding to the item of watermelon rising upward temper is created. In the stop control table, as described above, the symbol “watermelon”, “BAR”, or “7” always stops at the upper stage of the right reel regardless of the timing of the right reel stop operation.

  In addition, the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 26 and 27, the “watermelon” symbol of No. 8 stops at the middle stage of the left reel, and the stop operation of the middle reel at the timing other than the area numbers 30 to 33 Is detected, the “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle stage of the middle reel, and when the “watermelon” symbol is tempered on the left, middle reel winning line L1 (“watermelon” on the winning line L1, When the symbol of “BAR” or “7” stops, it becomes a chance, the stop control table on the right side of FIG. No. 19.21.23-23, 19.21.23-41, BB (1) (2) Loss, RB loss, left-medium stop symbol: a stop control table corresponding to the item of watermelon middle stage temper is created.In this stop control table, “watermelon” stops in the middle of the right reel, provided that the stop operation of the right reel is performed at the timing at which the 11th “watermelon” symbol can be pulled in as described above. At this timing, any of the symbols “watermelon”, “BAR” or “7” does not stop at the middle stage.

  As described above, when no winning combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the reels are stopped in the order of left, middle, and right, and the left reel is processed at the timing of area number 17. Stop operation is performed at the timing of the area number 23 or 41, or the operation of stopping the left reel is performed at the timing of the area numbers 19, 21, 23, and the area number 23 or “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon”, “Watermelon-Watermelon-BAR” are provided on the condition that the operation of stopping the middle reel is performed at the timing of 41 and the operation of stopping the right reel is performed at the timing of the area numbers 24-33. ”Or“ Watermelon-Watermelon-7 ”stops on the winning line, and the chance is derived as a display result.

  The probability that the stop operation of the left reel is performed at the timing of the area number 17, the stop operation of the middle reel is performed at the timing of the area number 23 or 41, and the stop operation of the right reel is performed at any timing is 1 / 882 (1/42 × 2/42 × 42/42), the left reel is stopped at the timing of the area numbers 19, 21, and 23, and the middle reel is stopped at the timing of the area numbers 23 or 41 The probability that the operation is performed and the right reel stop operation is performed at the timing of the region numbers 24 to 33 is 1 / 11234.8 (3/42 × 2/42 × 10/42). For this reason, the probability that a chance eye is derived in the case of not winning any combination in the normal gaming state (losing) is 1 / 514.5 (1/882 + 1 / 1234.8).

  In addition, the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel stops at the lower or middle level when the left reel is stopped at the timing of area numbers 16 to 23, so the “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower or middle level of the left reel. The probability of playing is 1 / 5.25 (8/42), but the chance is finally derived on the condition that the stop operation of the left reel is performed at the timing of the area numbers 17, 19, 21, and 23. Therefore, the probability that the “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower or middle of the left reel by performing the stop operation of the left reel at a timing satisfying the chance derivation condition is 1 / 10.5 (4 / 42). In addition, when the left reel is stopped at the timing of the region numbers 17, 19, 21, and 23, which are the conditions for deriving the chance eye, and the “watermelon” symbol stops in the lower or middle stage, the region numbers 4, 5, Since the “watermelon” symbol is stopped at the middle stage when the stop operation of the middle reel is performed at the timing of 12, 13, 20, 21, 23, 34 to 39, 41, the timing of the region numbers 17, 19, 21, 23 In the state where the stop operation of the left reel is performed and the “watermelon” symbol is stopped at the lower or middle stage, the probability that the “watermelon” symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel and the chance eye is tempered on the winning line is 1 / 3 (14/42), but the chance chance is finally derived on the condition that the operation of stopping the middle reel is performed at the timing of the area numbers 23 and 41. "Watermelon" symbol is stopped in the middle of the reel by the reel stop operation is performed at satisfying timing, the probability of chance th to Tenpai on the pay line becomes 1/21 (2/42).

  In addition, the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel stops at the lower or middle level when the left reel is stopped at the timing of area numbers 16 to 23, so the “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower or middle level of the left reel. The average number of drawn frames (the total number of drawn frames for each area number / number of area numbers) is 2 (16/8), but the left reel stops at the timing of area numbers 17, 19, 21, and 23. Since the chance chance is finally derived on the condition that the operation has been performed, the average number of frames to be drawn in the left reel when the chance eye is derived is 2.5 (10/4). . In addition, when the stop operation of the left reel is performed at the timing of the area numbers 17, 19, 21, and 23 which are the derivation conditions for the chance eye, and the “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower or middle stage of the left reel, the area number 1 Since the middle reel is stopped at the timing of ~ 15, 20-27, 34-42, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel, and the chance is on the winning line. The average number of frames to be drawn is 1.14 (16/14), but the chance is finally derived on the condition that the middle reel has been stopped at the timings of the area numbers 23 and 41. Therefore, the average number of frames drawn on the middle reel when the chance is derived is 3 (6/2).

  Further, in the case of not winning any combination in the normal gaming state (losing), the left reel stop operation is detected at the timing of area number 17 by detecting the stop operation of the left reel at the timing of area number 16. As in the case where the operation is detected, the number 8 “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower stage, and when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the region numbers 18, 20, 22, the region numbers 19, 21, As in the case where the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of 23, the “Watermelon” symbol of No. 8 stops in the middle stage, but when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 17, the No. 8 The "watermelon" symbol of No. 8 stops at the lower stage, or when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 19, 21, and 23, the No. 8 "watermelon" symbol stops at the middle stage As the final display result, chances are derived, so when the “watermelon” number 8 stops at the lower or middle of the left reel, that is, when the left reel is stopped, Even if the stop position is the same as the stop position from which the chance eyes are finally derived, the chance eyes may not be finally derived due to the different stop operation positions.

  Further, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 17, 19, 21, 23, and the “watermelon” symbol of No. 8 stops at the lower or middle stage, the area numbers 20-22, 24- When the middle reel stop operation is detected at timing 27, the 9th “watermelon” symbol stops at the middle stage in the same manner as when the middle reel stop operation is detected at timing area number 23. By detecting the middle reel stop operation at the timing of 38 to 40, 42, and 1 to 3, the 18th “watermelon” symbol is the same as when the middle reel stop operation is detected at the timing of the region number 41. Stops at the middle stage, but when the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of area number 23, the 9th “watermelon” symbol stops at the middle stage, or the operation of stopping the middle reel at the timing of area number 41 As a result of the detection, chances are derived as the final display result on the condition that the 18th “watermelon” symbol has stopped in the middle stage. When the "watermelon" symbol of Fig. 9 stops and the 9th or 18th "watermelon" symbol stops in the middle of the middle reel, that is, when the left reel and middle reel are stopped, the stop position of the left reel and middle reel is Even if it is the same as the stop position where the chance chance is finally derived, the chance chance may not be finally derived.

  On the other hand, when the big bonus (1) is won in the normal gaming state and other roles are not won (Big Bonus (1) + Loss), the reels are stopped in the order of left, middle and right. As the operation is performed, the left reel is stopped at the timing of the area numbers 16 and 17, and the middle reel is stopped at the timing of the area numbers 4 to 7, 26 to 29, 34 to 42, and 1 to 3. Left reel stop operation is performed at the timing of area numbers 18 to 27, and middle reel stop operation is performed at the timing of area numbers 4 to 7, 28, 29, 34 to 42, and 1 to 3. And any one of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”, “watermelon-watermelon-BAR”, and “watermelon-watermelon-7” on the condition that the stop operation of the right reel is performed at the timing of the area numbers 24 to 33 of Seen together is stopped on the winning line, chance eyes is derived as a result display.

  The stop operation of the left reel is performed at the timing of the region numbers 16 and 17, and the stop operation of the middle reel is performed at the timing of the region numbers 4 to 7, 26 to 29, 34 to 42, and 1 to 3, and either The probability that the right reel stop operation will be performed at the timing of 1/44 (2/42 × 20/42 × 42/42), and the left reel stop operation will be performed at the timing of area numbers 18 to 27. In addition, there is a probability that the middle reel stop operation is performed at the timings of the region numbers 4 to 7, 28, 29, 34 to 42, and 1-3, and the right reel stop operation is performed at the timings of the region numbers 24 to 33. 1 / 41.16 (10/42 × 18/42 × 10/42). For this reason, in the normal gaming state, when the big bonus (1) is won and the other combination is not won (big bonus (1) + losing), the probability that the chance eye is derived is 1/21. 29 (1 / 44.1 + 1 / 41.16).

  In addition, the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel stops at the lower or middle level when the left reel is stopped at the timing of area numbers 16 to 27, so the “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower or middle level of the left reel. The probability of doing is 1 / 3.5 (12/42). In addition, when the “watermelon” symbol stops in the lower stage of the left reel, the “watermelon” symbol is displayed in the middle stage by performing the stop operation of the middle reel at the timing of the area numbers 1 to 7, 26 to 29, and 34 to 42. Since the “watermelon” symbol is stopped at the lower stage of the left reel, the “watermelon” symbol is stopped at the middle stage of the middle reel, and the probability that the chance eye is tempered on the winning line is 1 / 2.1 (20 / 42). In addition, when the “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle of the left reel, the “watermelon” symbol is displayed in the middle by performing the stop operation of the middle reel at the timing of the area numbers 1 to 7, 28, 29, and 34 to 42. Since it stops, the probability that the “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle stage of the middle reel while the “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle stage of the left reel, and the chance of the tempering on the winning line is 1 / 2.33 (18 / 42).

  In addition, the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel stops at the lower or middle level when the left reel is stopped at the timing of area numbers 16 to 27, so the “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower or middle level of the left reel. The average number of frames drawn in, that is, the average number of frames drawn in the left reel when a chance is derived is 3.83 (46/12). In addition, when the “watermelon” symbol stops in the lower stage of the left reel, the “watermelon” symbol is displayed in the middle stage by performing the stop operation of the middle reel at the timing of the area numbers 1 to 7, 26 to 29, and 34 to 42. Since the “watermelon” symbol is stopped at the lower row of the left reel, the “watermelon” symbol is stopped at the middle row of the middle reel, and the average number of frames to be drawn when the chance eyes are tempered on the winning line, that is, left When the chance chance is derived in a state where the “watermelon” symbol is stopped at the lower stage of the reel, the average number of frames drawn in the middle reel is 3.5 (70/20). In addition, when the “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle of the left reel, the “watermelon” symbol is displayed in the middle by performing the stop operation of the middle reel at the timing of the area numbers 1 to 7, 28, 29, and 34 to 42. Since the “watermelon” symbol is stopped at the middle of the left reel, the “watermelon” symbol stops at the middle of the middle reel, and the average number of frames to be drawn when the chance eyes are tempered on the winning line, that is, left When the chances are derived with the “watermelon” symbol stopped in the middle stage of the reel, the average number of frames drawn in the middle reel is 3.17 (57/18).

  In the normal gaming state, when the big bonus (2) or regular bonus (1) is won and no other role is won (Big Bonus (2) + Loss or Regular Bonus (1) + Loss) In this case, the reels are stopped in the order of left, middle, and right, the left reel is stopped at the timing of the area numbers 22 to 25, and the middle reel is operated at timings other than the area numbers 30 to 33. A stop operation is performed, or a stop operation of the left reel is performed at the timing of the area numbers 26 and 27, and a stop operation of the middle reel is performed at a timing other than the area numbers 30 to 33, and the area numbers 24 to 33 are "Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon", "Watermelon-Watermelon-BAR", "Watermelon-Watermelon" Any combination of -7 "is stopped on the winning line, chance eyes is derived as a result display.

  The stop operation of the left reel is performed at the timing of the area numbers 22 to 25, the stop operation of the middle reel is performed at the timing other than the area numbers 30 to 33, and the stop operation of the right reel is performed at any timing. The probability is 1 / 1.61 (4/42 × 38/42 × 42/42), the left reel is stopped at the timing of the region numbers 26 and 27, and at timings other than the region numbers 30 to 33 The probability that the middle reel stop operation is performed and the right reel stop operation is performed at the timing of the region numbers 24 to 33 is 1 / 97.48 (2/42 × 38/42 × 10/42). For this reason, in the normal gaming state, when the big bonus (2) or regular bonus (1) is won and no other role is won (big bonus (2) + lose or regular bonus (1) + lose ) Is a probability of deriving a chance eye is 1 / 1.37 (1 / 11.61 + 1 / 97.48).

  In addition, the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel stops at the lower or middle level when the left reel is stopped at the timing of area numbers 22 to 27, so the “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower or middle level of the left reel. The probability of doing is 1/7 (6/42). In addition, when the “watermelon” symbol is stopped at the lower or middle stage of the left reel, the “watermelon” symbol is stopped at the middle stage by performing the stop operation of the middle reel at the timings of the area numbers 1 to 29 and 34 to 42. Therefore, the probability that the “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle stage of the middle reel while the “watermelon” symbol stops in the lower or middle stage of the left reel, and the chance eye is tempered on the winning line is 1 / 1.11 (38 / 42).

  In addition, the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel stops at the lower or middle level when the left reel is stopped at the timing of area numbers 22 to 27, so the “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower or middle level of the left reel. The average number of frames drawn in, that is, the average number of frames drawn in the left reel when a chance is derived is 7.83 (47/6). In addition, when the “watermelon” symbol is stopped at the lower or middle stage of the left reel, the “watermelon” symbol is stopped at the middle stage by performing the stop operation of the middle reel at the timings of the area numbers 1 to 29 and 34 to 42. Therefore, with the “watermelon” symbol stopped at the lower or middle of the left reel, the “watermelon” symbol stopped at the middle of the middle reel, and the average number of frames drawn when the chance eyes are tempered on the winning line, that is, the left When the chances are derived with the “watermelon” symbol stopped at the lower or middle stage of the reel, the average number of frames to be drawn in the middle reel is 3.55 (135/38).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the probability that a chance eye is derived is 1 / 514.5 when none of the roles is won (losing) in the normal gaming state, and the big bonus (1) in the normal gaming state. If the player has been won and the other role has not been won (Big Bonus (1) + Loss), the probability that the chance will be derived will be 1 / 21.29, and the Big Bonus (2) in the normal gaming state Alternatively, if the regular bonus (1) is won and no other role is won (Big Bonus (2) + Loss or Regular Bonus (1) + Loss), the probability that the chance is derived is 1 / 10.37. In other words, chances are higher when you win one of the bonuses in the normal gaming state and do not win any other role than when you do not win any of the roles in the normal gaming state. The eyes are derived.

  In addition, if none of the roles is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the probability that the “watermelon” symbol will stop in the middle or lower part of the left reel is 1 / 5.25, which is a big difference in the normal gaming state. If the bonus (1) has been won and no other role has been won (Big Bonus (1) + Loss), the probability that the “watermelon” symbol will stop in the middle or lower part of the left reel is 1 / 3.5. That is, it is more probable that the player has won the big bonus (1) in the normal gaming state and has not won the other role than the player who has not won in any of the normal gaming state. The "watermelon" symbol that constitutes the chance eye is derived on the left reel.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state, when any of the roles is not won (losing), the left reel is stopped at the timing that satisfies the derivation condition of the chance, so that “watermelon” The probability that the symbol will stop will be 1 / 10.5, and if the player wins the Big Bonus (2) or Regular Bonus (1) in the normal gaming state and does not win any other role (Big Bonus (2 ) + Loss or Regular Bonus (1) + Loss), the probability that the “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower or middle of the left reel is 1/7 (6/42). In other words, the probability that the “watermelon” symbol constituting the chance eye is derived by performing the stop operation of the left reel at the timing that satisfies the chance eye derivation condition is not won in any role in the normal gaming state. It will be higher if you win one of the bonuses in the normal gaming state and not win another role.

  In addition, when none of the winning combinations is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the operation of stopping the left reel is performed at the timing of the area numbers 17, 19, 21, and 23, which are the derivation conditions for the chances. If the “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower or middle level, the “watermelon” symbol stops at the middle level of the middle reel, and the chance that the chance will be tempered on the winning line is 1/3. In case of winning 1) and not winning other roles (Big Bonus (1) + Loss), if the “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower or middle of the left reel, The probability that the “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle and the chance will be tempered on the winning line is 1 / 2.1, which is a big bonus (2) or regulation in the normal gaming state -If you have won the bonus (1) and you have not won any other role (Big Bonus (2) + Loss or Regular Bonus (1) + Loss) When the symbol stops, the probability that the “watermelon” symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel and the chance eye is tempered on the winning line is 1 / 1.11. In other words, when the chance eyes stop on the left reel and the middle reel, the probability that the chance eyes are tempered on the winning line is higher in the normal gaming state than in the case where no role is won in the normal gaming state. It is higher if you have won the bonus and have not won other roles.

  In addition, in the normal game state, when any of the roles is not won (losing), the average number of frames drawn when the “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower or middle of the left reel is 2, and the chance When the left reel is stopped at a timing satisfying the derivation condition, the average number of frames to be drawn when the “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower or middle of the left reel is 2.5. In addition, when the big bonus (1) is won in the normal gaming state and other roles are not won (Big Bonus (1) + Loss), the “Watermelon” symbol is displayed at the lower or middle of the left reel. The average number of draws at the time of stopping is 3.83. In the normal gaming state, when winning the big bonus (2) or regular bonus (1) and not winning other roles (big bonus (2 ) + Loss or Regular Bonus (1) + Loss), the average number of frames drawn when the “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower or middle of the left reel is 7.83. In other words, when the “watermelon” symbol that constitutes the chance eye in the left reel is derived, any bonus is won in the normal gaming state than in the case where no role is won in the normal gaming state. If the winning combination has not been won, the average number of draws will be higher, and the “watermelon” symbol that constitutes the chance will be derived on the left reel. The amount of fluctuation until it stops is increased.

  In addition, when none of the winning combinations is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the left reel is stopped at the timings of the area numbers 17, 19, 21, and 23, which are the derivation conditions for the chances. Or if the “Watermelon” symbol stops in the middle row, the “Watermelon” symbol stops in the middle row of the middle reel, and the average number of draws when the chance item is tempered on the winning line is 1.14. When the operation of stopping the middle reel is performed at a timing satisfying the derivation condition of the eyes, the average number of frames to be drawn when the “watermelon” symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel is 3. In addition, when the big bonus (1) is won in the normal gaming state and other roles are not won (Big Bonus (1) + Loss), the “Watermelon” symbol stops at the bottom of the left reel. If the “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle row of the middle reel, the average number of draws when the chance is tempered on the winning line is 3.5, and the “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel In addition, the “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle of the middle reel, and the average number of draws when the chance item is tempered on the winning line is 3.17. ) And not in any other role (Big Bonus (2) + Loss or Regular Bonus (1) + Loss) If other you stop the "watermelon" symbol in the middle, in the middle of the middle reel stops "watermelon" symbol, the average number of lead-frame of when the opportunity first to Tenpai on the pay line will be 3.55. In other words, when the “watermelon” symbol constituting the chance eye is derived on the middle reel and the chance eye is tempered on the winning line, the normal gaming state is more than the case where no role is won in the normal gaming state. If you have won one of the bonuses and have not won any other role, the average number of draws will be larger and the stop operation will be performed when the chance is tempered on the winning line. The amount of fluctuation from when it is broken until the reel stops is increased.

  Next, commands that the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 sends a plurality of types of commands including an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a gaming state command, and a standby command to the effect control board 90. Send.

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of pachinko balls to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The gaming state command is a command that can specify the gaming state of the next game (whether it is a normal gaming state, a big bonus, a regular bonus, etc.), and is transmitted at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and is transmitted when the transition to the standby state is made after a certain time has elapsed without setting the bet amount after the end of one game.

  These commands are generated in a startup process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a command queue provided in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the timer interrupt process (A) described above.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the effect control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 receives the command transmitted by the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41, the CPU 91a refers to the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b, and displays the liquid crystal display based on the control content registered in the control pattern table. Various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are controlled.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the CPU 91a receives a command, the CPU 91a receives among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. With reference to the control pattern corresponding to the type of command, the effect device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  In addition, the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 continuously executes the game over a plurality of games, and executes a continuous effect of notifying whether or not the bonus is finally won.

  FIG. 19A is a flowchart showing the flow of the continuous effect, and FIG. 19B is a diagram showing the winning probability in the continuous effect lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, the CPU 91a executes a continuous effect lottery to determine whether or not to execute a continuous effect every time an internal winning command is received in the normal gaming state, that is, every time an internal lottery is performed. To do. Then, when the continuous effect lottery is won, the continuous effect is executed. On the other hand, even when the continuous effect lottery is not won, if the chance stops, the continuous effect is executed. In addition, when the chance eyes are stopped during the execution of the continuous performance, the chance eyes are invalidated, and the continuous performance is not newly executed. Further, after winning one of the bonuses, the continuous effect is executed even once, and if the bonus is announced, the continuous effect lottery is not performed thereafter. That is, after winning one of the bonuses, the continuous effect is executed even once, and when the bonus is announced, the continuous effect is not further executed.

  The RAM 91c of the effect control unit 91 is set with a chance eye counter indicating the appearance rate of the chance eye, and the CPU 91a performs a process of updating the game chance eye counter according to the presence or absence of the chance eye. .

  The CPU 91a initializes (updates to 0) the value of the chance eye counter when the effect control unit 91 is activated. Then, when the display result is derived for all the reels in each game in the normal gaming state, it is determined whether or not the chance eye has been derived. If the chance eye has not been derived, the value of the chance eye counter is set to 1. If the chance eye is derived, the value of the chance eye counter is incremented by 300. Thereby, when the appearance rate of the chance eye from the time of starting the effect control unit 91 exceeds 1/300, the value of the chance eye counter exceeds 0, and when it is 1/300 or less, the chance The value of the eye counter is 0 or less. That is, the value of the chance eye counter can specify whether the appearance rate of chance eyes from the time of activation exceeds 1/300 or 1/300 or less.

  In the continuous effect lottery, as shown in FIG. 19 (b), the winning probability varies depending on whether or not any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, and furthermore, when any bonus is not won. Is a probability of winning depending on whether the appearance rate of the chance eye in the normal gaming state exceeds 1/300 or 1/300 or less, that is, whether the value of the above-mentioned chance eye counter exceeds 0 or 0 or less. Is different.

  Specifically, in the case where no bonus is won in the normal gaming state, and the chance rate of appearance in the normal gaming state exceeds 1/300, the winning probability of 3/1993 (1 / 664.33) In the case where the execution of the continuous production is determined and no bonus is won in the normal game state, and the chance rate of appearance in the normal game state is 1/300 or less, 10/1993 (1 / If the execution of the continuous performance is decided with the winning probability of 199.3) and any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, the continuous performance is performed with the winning probability of 350/1993 (1 / 5.69). Decide on execution.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the continuous performance is executed when the chance is derived in the normal gaming state. In addition, the continuous effect lottery is executed in each game in the normal gaming state, and the continuous effect is also executed when winning the continuous effect lottery. That is, even when the chance is not derived, the continuous effect is executed when the continuous effect lottery is won.

  In addition, when none of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state, when the chance rate of appearance is a predetermined rate (1/300) or less, the chance rate of appearance is a predetermined rate (1 / The execution of the continuous performance is determined with a higher probability than in the case of exceeding 300).

  Further, in this embodiment, the winning probability (1 / 664.33) of the continuous performance when the appearance rate of chance chances exceeds 1/300 in the normal gaming state is won for any role in the normal gaming state. If there is no chance (losing), it is lower than the probability that the chance is derived (1 / 514.5), and if a bonus is won in a normal gaming state, the winning probability of continuous production (1 / 5.69) ) Is a chance that a chance is derived when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and the other combination is not won (1 when the big bonus (1) is won) /21.29, higher than 1 / 1.37 when the big bonus (2) or regular bonus (1) is won, so the chance rate of appearance in the normal gaming state is 1/30 In situations where the number of bonuses is over, the bonus will be won when the continuous production is executed without the appearance of the chance, rather than when the continuous production with the appearance of the chance is executed. There is a high possibility of being.

  In addition, the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 performs control to output a reel stop sound every time a reel stop command is received, that is, every time the reel stops.

  The reel stop sound includes a stop sound A and a stop sound B, and the CPU 91a performs a control to always output the stop sound A in a game state (small role game, regular bonus) other than the normal game state.

  In the normal gaming state, control is performed to output one of the stop sounds A and B. Specifically, if no winning combination is won in the normal gaming state, a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 17, 19, 21, and 23 while all reels are rotating. When a reel stop command indicating that the number “watermelon” symbol has stopped in the lower or middle stage is received, that is, when the stop operation position of the left reel satisfies the chance derivation condition, a stop sound is generated at a ratio of 20/31. Control for outputting A is performed, and control for outputting stop sound B at a ratio of 11/31 is performed. On the other hand, when a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 16, 18, 20, 22 and a reel stop command is received indicating that the number 8 “watermelon” symbol has stopped at the lower or middle level, that is, left When the reel stop operation position does not satisfy the chance eye derivation condition, but the display result is such that the chance eye can be derived, control is performed to output the stop sound A at a ratio of 29/31. Control is performed to output stop sound B at a rate.

  In the state where only the left reel has been stopped and the stop operation of the left reel has been detected at the timing of the area numbers 17, 19, 21, 23, and the “Watermelon” symbol of No. 8 has stopped in the lower or middle stage, the area number When a middle reel stop operation is detected at the timing of 23, 41 and a reel stop command is received indicating that the No. 9 or No. 18 “watermelon” symbol has stopped in the middle stage, that is, the left reel and middle reel stop operation When the position satisfies the derivation condition for the chance, control is performed to output the stop sound A at a ratio of 15/31, and control is performed to output the stop sound B at a ratio of 16/31. On the other hand, in a state where only the left reel has been stopped and the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 17, 19, 21, and 23, and the “watermelon” symbol of No. 8 is stopped at the lower stage or the middle stage, When a stop operation of the middle reel is detected at a timing other than the area numbers 23 and 41 and a reel stop command is received indicating that one of the “watermelon” symbols has stopped in the middle stage, or only the left reel has been stopped. In addition, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 16, 18, 20, and 22, and the “watermelon” symbol of No. 8 is stopped at the lower stage or the middle stage, the stop operation of the middle reel is detected. When the “watermelon” symbol is received in a reel stop command indicating that it has stopped in the middle, that is, the stop operation position of the left reel or the middle reel is the chance Control that outputs stop sound A at a ratio of 30/31 and outputs stop sound B at a ratio of 1/31 when a display result that does not satisfy the output condition but a chance chance can be derived. I do.

  In a situation where the left reel and the middle reel have been stopped, and the stop operation position of the left reel and the middle reel satisfies the chance eye derivation condition, the right reel stop operation is detected and the chance eye is established. When a reel stop command indicating that the “watermelon”, “7”, and “BAR” symbols have stopped is received, that is, when a chance is derived when all reels stop, a ratio of 10/31 The control for outputting the stop sound A is performed at, and the control for outputting the stop sound B at a ratio of 21/31 is performed.

  Further, if any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and no other combination is won, a stop operation of the left reel is detected while all reels are rotating, and the number “8” When a reel stop command indicating that the “watermelon” symbol has stopped at the lower or middle stage is received, that is, when the left reel stop position satisfies the chance derivation condition, the stop sound A is output at a ratio of 15/31. Control is performed to output stop sound B at a ratio of 16/31.

  When only the left reel has been stopped and the number 8 “watermelon” symbol is stopped at the lower or middle level, a stop operation of the middle reel is detected and one of the “watermelon” symbols has stopped at the middle level. When the reel stop command shown is received, that is, when the stop positions of the left reel and the middle reel satisfy the chance derivation condition, control is performed to output the stop sound A at a ratio of 10/31, and a ratio of 21/31. The control for outputting the stop sound B is performed.

  In a situation where the left reel and the middle reel have been stopped, and the stop operation position of the left reel and the middle reel satisfies the chance eye derivation condition, the right reel stop operation is detected and the chance eye is established. When a reel stop command indicating that the “watermelon”, “7”, and “BAR” symbols have stopped is received, that is, when chances are derived when all reels stop, a ratio of 5/31 The control for outputting the stop sound A is performed at, and the control for outputting the stop sound B at a ratio of 26/31 is performed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, every time the reels stop, whether the reel to be stopped is any one of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, and the stop of the corresponding reel. Since a reel stop command capable of specifying the position area number is transmitted to the effect control unit 91, the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 stops the reel when the reel stops. Different effects can be performed depending on not only the position but also the stop operation position.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state, when the left reel and the middle reel are stopped, the stop position of the left reel and the middle reel is finally derived as a chance. Even if it is the same as the stop position, if the stop operation position of the left reel and the stop operation position of the middle reel do not satisfy the chance eye derivation condition, the chance eye is not finally derived. When the reel stop command is received and the stop operation position satisfies the chance derivation condition, the stop operation position does not satisfy the chance derivation condition, but the display result is such that the chance eye can be derived. Control for outputting the stop sound B at a higher rate is performed. For this reason, when the left reel and the middle reel are stopped, even if the same display result is obtained, there is a possibility that the chance chance is finally derived when the stop sound B is output rather than the stop sound A is output. Rise.

  Also, in this embodiment, when each reel is stopped, the stop sound is played at a higher rate when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state than when no combination is won. Since B is output, it is more likely that one of the bonuses is won when the stop sound B is output than when the stop sound A is output when each reel is stopped. The more reels to which B is output, the higher the possibility that one of the bonuses is won.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  When a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the CPU 41a performs a startup process shown in the flowchart of FIG. The reset signal is a signal that is output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the game control unit 41 is stagnant. This is a process to be performed.

  In the start-up process, first, the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sa1), then the voltage drop signal detection data is acquired from the input port, and whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. That is, it is determined whether or not the voltage is stable (Sa2), and if the voltage drop signal is input, any processing is performed except for determining whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. There is no loop processing.

  If it is determined in step Sa2 that the voltage drop signal is not input, the values of the I register and IY register are initialized (Sa3), the state of the stop switch 36 is acquired, and a specific register of the CPU 41a is acquired. The valid / invalid of the stop function is set in (Sa4). By the initialization of the I register and the IY register, the address of the interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and the reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa5), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state (Sa6). If the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state in step Sa6, the RAM parity of all storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa7). Is determined (Sa8). If the power interruption interrupt processing is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sa8, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. An error code indicating abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa8, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa9). If power interruption interrupt processing is performed normally, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set. If the data for destruction diagnosis is not normal in step Sa9 (the data for destruction diagnosis is stored at the time of power interruption. In the case other than 5A (H), the data in the RAM 41c is not normal. Therefore, an error code indicating the RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG.

  In the error processing, as shown in FIG. 21, the current display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is saved in the stack (Sb1), and the error code set in the RAM 41c is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sb2). .

  Next, the error code set in the register is confirmed, it is determined whether the error code is an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error (Sb3), and an error code indicating an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error is set. If it is determined that the error code is an error code indicating a RAM abnormality error, the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed except for the determination.

  If an error code indicating a non-RAM error is set in step Sb3, it is determined whether an operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sb4). If the operation is not detected, it is further determined whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected (Sb5). If the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, the process returns to the step Sb4. That is, the game waits in a state where the progress of the game is impossible until the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is detected.

  When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step Sb4 or when the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step Sb5, the error code set in the register is cleared (Sb6 ), The display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to the display state saved in the stack in step Sb1 (Sb7), and the process returns to the original process.

  As described above, in the error processing, if the error processing is other than the RAM abnormality error, the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated to return to the original processing even if the error state is canceled. In the case of error processing due to a RAM abnormality error, the error state is not canceled even if the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated.

  Returning to FIG. 20, if it is determined in step Sa9 that the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal, so the non-saved work, the unused area, and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are initialized. After performing initialization 3 (Sa11), the destruction diagnosis data is cleared (Sa12). Next, each register is restored to the state before the power interruption, that is, the state saved in the stack (Sa13), the interrupt is permitted (Sa14), and the process that was executed last before the power interruption is returned.

  If the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state in the step of Sa6, after executing initialization 1 for initializing all storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area (Sa15), The value (0 at this time) stored in the set value work is corrected to 1 (Sa16). Next, interruption is permitted (Sa17), and the setting change process shown in FIG. 22, that is, the setting change mode is entered (Sa18). After the setting change process is completed, the process proceeds to the game process.

  In the setting change process, as shown in FIG. 22, the setting value stored in the setting value work of the RAM 41c (the value of the setting value work is corrected to 1 before shifting to the setting changing process. Is read out (Sc1).

  Thereafter, the operation waits for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 (Sc2, Sc3). When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sc2, the setting value read in the step of Sc1. 1 is added (Sc4), and it is determined whether or not the set value after addition is 7, that is, whether or not the settable range is exceeded (Sc5). If the set value after addition is not 7, After returning to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3 again, if the setting value after addition is 7 in the step Sc5, the setting value is corrected to 1 (Sc6). ), The process returns to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3.

  When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in the step of Sc3, the changed set value selected at that time is stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c and the set value is confirmed (Sc7). Wait until the setting key switch 37 is turned off (Sc8). If it is determined in step Sc8 that the setting key switch 37 is OFF, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  As described above, in the startup process, when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is stored in the RAM 41c by determining whether or not the RAM parity is 0 and whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal. It is determined whether or not the stored data is normal. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the process proceeds to an abnormal error process. In the error processing due to the RAM abnormal error, an error code indicating the RAM abnormal error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and then the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is performed, so that the progress of the game is disabled. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, interrupts are not permitted. Therefore, once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM error, the setting key switch 37 is activated and interrupts are permitted. Until it is interrupted, no power interruption processing is performed even if the power is interrupted. That is, the RAM adjustment data is not calculated and stored so that the RAM parity is newly set to 0 in the power interruption interrupt process, and the destruction diagnosis data is not newly set. Even if the game is started, the game cannot be resumed even if the CPU 41a is restarted except when the setting key switch 37 is turned on.

  Once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM abnormality error, the setting key switch 37 is activated in the ON state, and after all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, a setting change process is performed. The game cannot be progressed until a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. In other words, in the state where the error processing due to the RAM abnormality error is started, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is canceled and the game is resumed on the condition that a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. It becomes possible to make it.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a prize ball giving process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6) are sequentially executed. When the game end process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sd1, the process waits in a state where the bet number can be set, sets a predetermined number of bets according to the gaming state, and executes a process of determining the bet number when the start switch 7 is operated. To do.

  In the internal lottery process in step Sd2, a random number for internal lottery is extracted simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in step Sd1, and the winning of each above-described combination is permitted based on the extracted random number value. Process to determine whether or not. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on the respective lottery results.

  In the reel rotation process in the step of Sd3, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the operation of the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R detected by the player are detected. A process for stopping the rotation is executed.

  In the winning determination process in the step Sd4, when it is determined in the step Sd3 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed.

  In the prize ball granting process in the step Sd5, when it is determined in the step Sd4 that a prize has been generated, a process of requesting payout of pachinko balls corresponding to the number of prize balls given in accordance with the prize is performed.

  In the game end process in the step of Sd6, a process of setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the control content of the BET process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd1.

  In the BET process, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the bet amount is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se1), and it is determined whether or not the game is a replay game (Se2). If a replay game flag indicating that a replay game is in progress is set in the RAM 41c and it is determined that the game is a replay game, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1, and the bet set in the RAM 41c is set. Specified number of numbers (explained later, this is the specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state, and is set to 1 when in the regular bonus, and 3 when in the normal gaming state and the small role game. However, the process (Se3, Se4) for determining whether or not the value of the BET counter is a prescribed number is referred to in step Se4. Until it is determined that the value of the BET counter is a specified number, and in step Se4, the value of the BET counter is a specified number. If it is a constant, it waits in the detection standby state of operation of the start switch 7 (Se5). When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in this state, the BET process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Further, if the game is not a replay game in the step of Se2, the process proceeds to the step of Se6, and whether or not the card unit connection signal on is detected, that is, the card unit 400 is connected to the payout control board 60. It is determined whether or not.

  If it is detected in step Se6 that the card unit connection signal is on, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Se7). If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, Then, the process proceeds to the settlement control process shown in FIG. 25 (Se8), and when the settlement control process ends, the process returns to the step Se6. Further, when the process proceeds to the settlement control process, the detection of the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the settlement switch 10, and the start switch 7 is invalidated until the process ends.

  If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in the step of Se7, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number by referring to the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c (Se9). If the value of the counter is a specified number, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 7 is detected (Se10). If the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected, the process returns to the step of Se6 and the start switch 7 is detected. If the operation is detected, the BET process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. Along with this, detection of operations of the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the checkout switch 10, and the start switch 7 is invalidated.

  If the value of the BET counter is not a predetermined number in the step of Se9, it is determined whether or not the operation of the one-ball intake switch 5 is detected (Se11), and the operation of the one-ball intake switch 5 is detected. For example, the value of the fetched ball counter set in the RAM 41c (a counter that stores the number of fetched balls that has not been fetched among the number of balls to be fetched) is updated to 1 (Se12). Then, the process shifts to the capture control process shown in FIG. 26 (Se13), and when the capture control process ends, the process returns to the step Se6. Further, when the process shifts to the capture control process, the detection of the operation of the one-ball capture switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the settlement switch 10, and the start switch 7 is invalidated until the process ends.

  If the operation of the one-ball take-in switch is not detected in the step of Se11, it is further determined whether or not the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected (Se14), and if the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected. Returning to the step of Se6, if the operation of the MAXBET6 is detected, the value of the take-in ball counter is (specified number × 5-BET counter value × 5-unused ball counter (the counter set in the RAM 41c). , A value of a counter that stores the number of unused balls that have already been taken in but have not yet been used for setting the betting number) (Se15). In other words, the value of the take-in ball counter is determined from the take-in request ball number instructed by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 and the used ball number that has already been used for setting the bet number and the unused ball number that has not been used for setting the bet number yet. Update the value by subtracting the number of balls. Then, the process shifts to the capture control process shown in FIG. 26 (Se13), and when the capture control process ends, the process returns to the step Se6. Further, when the process shifts to the capture control process, the detection of the operation of the one-ball capture switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the settlement switch 10, and the start switch 7 is invalidated until the process ends.

  Also, in the step of Se6, when the card unit connecting signal on is not detected, an error code indicating a connection error indicating that the card unit 400 is not normally connected to the slot machine 1 is set ( Se16). When the error code is set, the error code is displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12 and a connection error is notified outside the gaming machine. Then, it is determined whether or not an operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Se17). If an operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the process proceeds to the settlement control process shown in FIG. 25 (Se8), and the settlement control process is performed. When is finished, the process returns to the step of Se6. Further, when the process proceeds to the settlement control process, the detection of the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the settlement switch 10, and the start switch 7 is invalidated until the process ends.

  If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in the step of Se17, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (Se18). If the value of the BET counter is a specified number, the start switch 7 It is determined whether or not an operation is detected (Se19). If an operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the BET process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. Along with this, detection of operations of the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the checkout switch 10, and the start switch 7 is invalidated.

  If the value of the BET counter is not a prescribed number in the step of Se18, or if the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected in the step of Se19, whether or not the card unit connecting signal is detected, that is, the card It is determined whether or not the unit 400 and the payout control board 60 are in a connected state (Se20). If on of the card unit connecting signal is not detected, the process returns to the step of Se6 and the card unit connecting signal If on is detected, the error code indicating the connection error set in the step of Se16 is cleared (Se21), and the process returns to the step of Se6. Accordingly, the display of the error code displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is also released.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the settlement control process executed by the CPU 41a in step Se8.

  In the settlement control process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the unused ball counter is 0 (Se101). If the value of the unused ball counter is 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 ( Se102).

  If neither the value of the unused ball counter or the value of the BET counter is 0 in the steps of Se101 and Se102, the value of the unused ball counter is calculated as (the value of the unused ball counter + the value of the BET counter × 5 ), That is, the total value of the number of unused balls and the number of used balls (Se103), and the values of the unused ball counter and the BET counter are cleared (Se104). Then, the process proceeds to a payment request process for requesting payment of the pachinko ball for the value of the unsettled ball counter to the payout control board 60 (Se105). When the payment request process is completed, the payment control process is terminated as it is. Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the unused ball counter value and the BET counter value are both 0 in the steps of Se101 and Se102, whether or not the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is detected, that is, the return ball in the return ball guide passage 109 is detected. (Se106), and if the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is not detected, it is further determined whether or not the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected, that is, in the payout ball guiding passage 208. It is determined whether or not the payout ball is clogged (Se107). Then, if the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is detected in the step of Se106 or the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected in the step of Se107, the settlement control process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If neither the return ball clogging detection switch 111 nor the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected in the steps of Se106 and Se107, the rotational drive amount of the take-in motor 101 is set to 100 balls (Se108), and the sorting solenoid is set. 102 is turned on (Se119), and the flow direction of the taken pachinko sphere is set to the return ball guiding passage 109 side.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the actual flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is the return ball guiding path 109 side, that is, whether or not the flow path detection switch 115 is on (Se110). If the actual flow path direction is on the return ball guiding passage 109 side, the setting of the take-in motor 101 is turned on and the take-in operation is started (Se111). That is, based on the detection state of the flow path detection switch 115 that detects the flow path direction of the flow path switching valve 107, the drive of the take-in motor 101 is performed on the condition that the actual flow path direction faces the return ball guide path 109 side. To start.

  While the intake motor 101 is being driven, it is determined whether or not the actual flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is on the return ball guiding path 109 side, that is, whether or not the flow path detection switch 115 is on (Se112). ) If the flow path direction is on the return ball guide passage 109 side, it is determined whether or not a drive stop condition for the take-in motor 101 is satisfied (Se113 to Se116). Specifically, in the step of Se113, the detection status of the first capture ball detection switch 104 and the second capture ball detection switch 105 is checked, and the capture is performed for a specified time (for example, 3 seconds) after the last capture ball is detected. It is determined whether or not an incoming ball is detected, and it is determined whether or not the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is detected in the step of Se114, that is, whether or not the return ball is clogged in the return ball guide passage 109. In the step of Se115, it is determined whether or not the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected, that is, whether or not the payout ball is clogged in the payout ball guide passage 208, and in the step of Se116, the rotational drive is performed. It is determined whether or not the rotation for 100 balls has been completed.

  If none of the drive stop conditions for the take-in motor 101 is satisfied in steps Se113 to Se116, the process returns to step Se112. Further, when any one of the drive conditions of the take-in motor 101 is established in the steps of Se113 to Se116, that is, when the take-in ball has not been detected for a specified time since the last take-in ball was detected. When the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is detected, when the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected or when rotation for 100 balls is completed, the setting of the take-in motor 101 is turned off ( Se117) After the processing (Se118) of setting the flow direction of the pachinko sphere taken in with the sorting solenoid 102 turned off to the side of the take-in ball guiding passage 108 (Se118), the settlement control processing is terminated, and the flowchart of FIG. Return to.

  Further, when the flow path direction is not on the return ball guiding passage 109 side in the step of Se110 or Se112, that is, the flow switching valve is switched to the return ball guiding passage 109 side with the sorting solenoid 102 turned on. When the flow direction by 107 is not switched to the return ball guide passage 109 side, or while the take-in motor 101 is being driven, the sorting solenoid 102 is in the on state, and the flow direction is at the return ball guide passage 109 side. In spite of the fact, if the flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 faces the take-in ball guiding passage 108 side, the setting of the take-in motor 101 is turned off (Se119), and the sorting solenoid 102 is turned off. After setting (Se120), after setting an error code indicating a channel direction error indicating a channel direction error (Se121). The process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. 21 (Se122). Then, when the error state is canceled and the error process is finished, the settlement control process is finished and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the capture control process executed by the CPU 41a in step Se13.

  In the take-in control process, first, 3 is set in the retry counter set in the RAM 41c (a counter for storing the retry count of the take-in operation) (Se301), and the take-in motor 101 corresponding to the value of the take-in ball counter is set. , That is, the rotational drive amount necessary to capture the number of spheres set in the capture ball counter is set (Se302). In this state, the sorting solenoid 102 is in the off state, and the flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is in the state facing the intake ball guiding path 108 side.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the actual flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is on the intake ball guiding path 108 side, that is, whether or not the flow path detection switch 115 is in an off state (Se303). If the actual flow path direction is based on the take-in ball guiding passage 108 side, the take-in motor 101 is set to on and the take-in operation is started (Se304). That is, based on the detection state of the flow path detection switch 115 that detects the flow path direction of the flow path switching valve 107, the condition of the intake motor 101 is determined on the condition that the actual flow path direction faces the intake ball guide passage 108 side. Start driving.

  While the intake motor 101 is being driven, it is determined whether or not the actual flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is on the intake ball guiding path 108 side, that is, whether or not the flow path detection switch 115 is in an off state ( Se305), if the flow path direction is on the intake ball guide passage 108 side, the detection status of the first intake ball detection switch 104 and the second intake ball detection switch 105 is checked, and whether or not the intake ball is detected. Is determined (Se306).

  When the captured ball is detected in the step of Se306, the value of the captured ball counter is decremented by 1, and the value of the unused ball counter is incremented by 1 (Se307). At this time, the number of captured balls displayed on the captured / paid-in ball display 11 is also incremented by one. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the unused ball counter is 5, that is, whether or not the number of balls necessary to set the bet number is 1 (Se308). If the value of the unused ball counter is less than 5, Se305 is determined. Return to the step. If the value of the unused sphere counter is 5 in the step of Se308, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 and the value of the unused sphere counter is cleared (Se309), and the process returns to the step of Se305.

  Further, if the take-in ball is not detected in the step of Se306, it is determined whether or not the take-in motor 101 is on, that is, whether or not the take-in motor 101 is still being driven (Se310). If 101 is on, it is determined whether or not the rotation for the rotation drive amount, that is, the value of the take-in ball counter has ended (Se311). If the rotation for the rotation drive amount has not ended, the process proceeds to Se305. Returning to the step, if the rotation for the rotational drive amount has been completed, the setting of the take-in motor 101 is turned off (Se312), and the process returns to the step of Se305.

  If the take-in motor 101 is not on in the step of Se310, the take-in motor 101 is turned off, and the pachinko ball taken in by the rotation of the take-in motor 101 is detected by the second take-in ball detection switch 105. It is determined whether or not a detection waiting time that is a time required for detection has elapsed (Se313). If the detection waiting time has not elapsed, the process returns to the step of Se305.

  If the detection waiting time has elapsed in the step of Se313, whether or not the value of the take-in ball counter is 0, that is, the number of balls requested by the operation of the 1-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is taken in. If the value of the take-in ball counter is not 0, that is, if the number of balls requested by the operation of the 1-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 has not been taken in, It is determined whether or not the value of the retry counter is 0, that is, whether or not the capturing operation for capturing the shortage of pachinko balls has been performed for the number of retries (Se315). If the value of the retry counter is not 0, The value of the retry counter is decremented by 1 (Se316), and the process returns to the step of Se302.

  If the value of the take-in ball counter is 0 in the step of Se314, the retry counter value is cleared (Se317), the take-in control process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. Further, if the value of the retry counter is 0 in the step of Se315, the value of the take-in ball counter is cleared (Se318), the take-in control process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  Further, in the step of Se303 or Se306, when the flow path direction is not on the intake ball guide passage 108 side, that is, the sorting solenoid 102 is in the off state, and the flow path direction is on the intake ball guide passage 108 side. In spite of this, when the flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 faces the return ball guide passage 109 or when the take-in motor 101 is driven, the sorting solenoid 102 is in the off state, and the flow path If the direction of the flow path by the flow path switching valve 107 faces the return ball guide path 109 side even though the direction is the intake ball guide path 108 side, the setting of the intake motor 101 is set to off ( Se319) After clearing the values of the retry counter and the take-in ball counter (Se320), an error code indicating a channel direction error indicating a channel direction error is set. (Se321), the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG. 21 (Se322), the error state is canceled, the error processing is completed, and ends the capture control processing, returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. 24.

  As described above, in the BET process, when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is effectively detected, the process proceeds to the settlement control process, and when the number of bets of 1 or more has already been set or the value of the unused ball counter is not 0. In this case, that is, when the taken-in ball remains, a settlement request is performed, and a settlement request process for returning the captured ball to the player is performed based on the settlement request, and then the settlement control process is terminated. On the other hand, when the number of bets is not set and the value of the unused ball counter is 0, the flow direction of the pachinko ball taken in by the take-in device 100 is set to the return ball guide passage 109 side. After the take-in motor 101 is driven in the state, control for returning the pachinko balls in the take-in device 100 is performed, and then the settlement control process is terminated.

  Also, in the settlement request process, even if the dispensing communication error determination time has elapsed from the time when the settlement request is made, the operation signal off is not detected, that is, the completion of the pachinko ball dispensing operation based on the settlement request is confirmed. If it cannot, the payout communication error flag is set and controlled to an error state. The error state is automatically canceled when the on-operation signal is detected to confirm the end of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payment request.

  Further, when the operation of the 1-ball take-in switch 5 is detected effectively, 1 is set in the take-in ball counter and the process proceeds to the take-in control process. The value of the capture ball counter obtained by subtracting the capture operation of the motion amount for capturing the ball by detecting the captured ball by the first capture ball detection switch 104 and the second capture ball detection switch 105 becomes 0. Or the retry counter that is subtracted every time the capture operation is performed is 0 until either condition is satisfied, and either condition is satisfied, the capture control The process ends.

  When the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected effectively, the number of used balls (the value of the BET counter × the number of balls used to set a prescribed number of bets according to the gaming state (15 balls)) 5) and the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of unused balls (the value of the unused ball counter), that is, the number of balls necessary to set the specified number of bets at that time is set in the take-in ball counter and loaded. The process proceeds to the control process, and the take-in operation for taking in the pachinko balls corresponding to the value of the take-in ball counter is subtracted by detection of the take-in balls by the first take-in ball detection switch 104 and the second take-in ball detection switch 105. Either until the value of the taken-in ball counter becomes 0 or the value of the retry counter that is subtracted every time the take-in operation is performed becomes 0, until either of the conditions is met. The capture control process ends when one of the conditions is met That.

  27 to 29 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the internal lottery process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd2.

  In the internal lottery process, first, a random number acquisition process whose details will be described later is performed (Sg1). In this random number acquisition process, a random number value for internal lottery is acquired based on a random number generated by a random number generation circuit (not shown).

  Then, the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is read (Sg2), and whether or not the read set value is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, the set value stored in the set value work is an appropriate value. If the read set value is not in the range of 1 to 6, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sg4), and the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG.

  Further, if the set value read in the step of Sg4 is in the range of 1 to 6, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (Sg5), and if it is the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state Correspondingly, the small combination and re-game combination are read out in the order registered in the winning combination table according to gaming state shown in FIG. 9A (Sg6). The BET number (the number of bets) set in the step of Sd1 is read, and the common flag of the combination corresponding to the small combination and re-playing combination of FIG. The setting status is acquired (Sg7). As a result, it is determined whether or not a common flag is set for the combination and the BET number (Sg8).

  If the common flag is set, the number of judgment values stored at the address registered in the role-specific table for the small combination and re-playing combination in FIG. 9B is acquired for the combination and the BET number. (Sg9). And it progresses to the step of Sg11. If the common flag is not set, the number of judgment values stored at the address registered in the role-specific table for the small combination and re-playing combination corresponding to the set value read for the combination and the BET number Obtain (Sg10). And it progresses to the step of Sg11.

  In the step of Sg11, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Sg9 or Sg10 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, and the result of the addition is used as a new random number value for internal lottery. Here, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred when the number of determination values is added to the random number for internal lottery (Sg12). If an overflow occurs, the winning flag for the combination is set in the RAM 41c (Sg13). Then, the process proceeds to step Sg15 shown in FIG.

  If no overflow has occurred in the step of Sg12, it is determined whether or not there is a combination that has not yet been set as a processing target among the small combination and re-playing combination defined for the normal gaming state (Sg14). If there is a combination that has not yet been processed, the process returns to the step of Sg6, and the processing is continued with the next combination from the small combination and re-game combination determined for the normal gaming state as the processing target. If there is no combination not to be processed, the process proceeds to step Sg15 shown in FIG.

  In step Sg15, it is determined whether a regular bonus or a big bonus winning flag has already been set in the RAM 41c in the previous game or not, and the game is carried over without winning based on the winning flag. If the winning flag for the regular bonus or the big bonus has already been set, the internal lottery process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. If neither the regular bonus winning flag nor the big bonus winning flag is set, the random number for internal lottery is returned to the value before addition, that is, the value acquired in the random number acquisition process of Sg1 (Sg16).

  Next, with reference to the winning combination table according to gaming state shown in FIG. 9 (a) and the special role combination table shown in FIG. 9 (c), lottery of the normal gaming state registered in the winning combination table according to gaming state The target special combination is read out in the order registered in the special combination table for special combination (Sg17). At this time, if the special role lose is registered in the special role-specific table, the special role loses are also read in the registered order. Furthermore, the setting status of the common flag is acquired from the role-specific table for special roles in FIG. 9C (Sg18). As a result, it is determined whether or not a common flag is set for the combination (Sg19).

  If the common flag is set, the number of determination values stored at the address registered in the special role-specific table of FIG. 9C for the role is acquired (Sg20). Then, the process proceeds to step Sg22. If the common flag is not set, the number of determination values stored in the address registered in the special role-specific table corresponding to the set value read for the corresponding role is acquired (Sg21). Then, the process proceeds to step Sg22.

  In the step of Sg22, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Sg20 or Sg21 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, and the result of the addition is used as a new random number value for internal lottery. Here, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred when the number of determination values is added to the random number for internal lottery (Sg23). When an overflow occurs, it is determined whether or not the combination is lost (Sg24). If the winning combination is lost, the internal lottery process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. If the winning combination is not lost, the winning flag for the winning combination is set in the RAM 41c (Sg25). Then, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If no overflow has occurred in the step of Sg23, it is determined whether or not there is a combination that has not yet been processed (Sg26). If there is a combination that has not yet been processed, the process returns to the step of Sg17, and processing is continued with the next combination from the special combination (including the special combination lost) determined for the normal gaming state as the processing target. If there is no combination not to be processed, the internal lottery process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the step of Sg5, if the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state, it is determined whether or not it is a small role game (Sg27). If it is a small role game, corresponding to the small role game, the winning combinations registered in the winning state-specific winning combination table of FIG. 9A are sequentially read (Sg28), and the process proceeds to Sg30. If it is not a small role game in the step of Sg27, it is a regular bonus. Therefore, in correspondence with the regular bonus, the roles registered in the winning combination table according to the gaming state in FIG. 9A are sequentially read (Sg29), Go to step.

  In step Sg30, it is determined whether or not the type of the combination read in steps Sg28 and Sg29 is regular bonus (2) or JACIN. In the case of regular bonus (2) or JACIN, whether the winning flag of regular bonus (2) has already been set in the RAM 41c in the previous game or not, and it is determined whether it has been carried over without winning based on the winning flag (Sg31). If the type of the read combination is neither regular bonus (2) nor JACIN, the process proceeds to step Sg32.

  If the winning flag for the regular bonus (2) has already been set, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 23 (Regular bonus (2) and JACIN are selected according to gaming state as described above. Since it is registered after the small role in the table, the internal lottery process is completed.) Even if the type of the read combination is regular bonus (2) or JACIN, if the winning flag for regular bonus (2) is not set, the process proceeds to step Sg32.

  In step Sg32, the number of BETs (number of bets) set in step Sd1 is further read, and the combination corresponding to the combination and the read BET number is obtained from the corresponding role-specific table in FIGS. 9B and 9C. Get the setting status of the common flag. As a result, it is determined whether or not a common flag is set for the combination and the BET number (Sg33).

  If the common flag is set, the number of determination values stored in the address registered in the corresponding role-specific table in FIGS. 9B and 9C is acquired for the role and the BET number (Sg34). . Then, the process proceeds to step Sg36. If the common flag is not set, the determination stored in the address registered in the corresponding role table shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C corresponding to the set value read for the role and the BET number. The number of values is acquired (Sg35). Then, the process proceeds to step Sg36.

  In the step of Sg36, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Sg34 or Sg35 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, and the result of addition is used as a new random number value for internal lottery. Here, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred when the number of determination values is added to the random number value for internal lottery (Sg37). If an overflow occurs, the winning flag for the combination is set in the RAM 41c (Sg38). Then, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If no overflow has occurred in the step of Sg37, it is determined whether or not there is a combination that has not yet been processed among the combinations determined for the gaming state (Sg39). If there is a combination that has not yet been processed, the process returns to the step of Sg27, and the processing continues with the next combination determined for the gaming state as the processing target. If there is no combination not to be processed, the internal lottery process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  As described above, in the internal lottery process, it is confirmed whether or not the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is an appropriate value. An error code indicating an error is set, and the process proceeds to error processing. As in the case where it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is not normal at the time of startup, an error state due to a RAM abnormality error occurs, and the game progress is disabled. It has become.

  Also, in the normal gaming state, since the random number for the same internal lottery is drawn separately for the small role and the re-playing role and the special role, the random number to be won in the normal gaming state A small combination (cherry in the present embodiment) and a special combination (big bonus (1) (2) in the present embodiment) with overlapping ranges may be won simultaneously.

  Next, the random number acquisition process in step Sg1 will be described in detail based on the flowchart of FIG. In the random number acquisition process, first, interrupts are prohibited (Sh1). Next, a sampling command is output to the sampling circuit 43, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 is latched, and the value of the latched random number is input from the I / O port 41d and extracted. The random number value extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41GR (Sh2).

  Next, the lower byte value and upper byte value of the random number stored in the general-purpose register 41GR are exchanged with each other using the work area of the RAM 41c (Sh3). At this time, the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR is acquired as a random number for internal lottery and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sh4). Then, after permitting the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sh1 (Sh5), the random number acquisition process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the reel rotation process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd3.

  In the reel rotation process, first, it is determined whether or not a wait time (about 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game (Si1), and the wait time must have elapsed. For example, it waits until the wait time elapses.

  If the wait time has elapsed in the Si1 step, a new wait time is set (Si2).

  Next, the work initialization code at the start of the rotation of the reel motor is set in the register, and the rotation of the reel is started (Si3). Then, referring to the table index, the table creation data is specified, and the stop control table corresponding to the game state of the game, the winning combination status of the game, and the stop status of other reels based on the specified table creation data Is created for each rotating reel (Si4), and the work initialization code at the time of completion of stop preparation is set in the register (Si5). As a result, the stop operation can be validated, and then the stop operation is effective when the constant speed rotation of the reel is detected in the origin interruption process of the timer interrupt process (A) described later. It becomes.

  Next, it is determined whether or not an operation of any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R is detected (Si6). If no operation of any stop switch is detected, a reel rotation error (over a certain period of time). Then, it is determined whether or not the reel sensor 33 detects an error when the reel reference position is not detected (Si7). If no reel rotation error has occurred, an error in taking in the pachinko ball is further detected. Whether or not an error is detected other than the period during which the take-in of pachinko balls is detected) and the payout error (outside the period during which the payout of the prize ball is allowed) , An error determined when award ball is detected) is determined (Si8, Si9), and any error is detected in steps Si7 to Si9. Also occurred to be determined, the flow returns to step Si6.

  Also, if it is determined that a take-in error has occurred in the Si8 step, or if a payout error is determined in the Si9 step, an error code indicating the take-in / out error during reel rotation is set in the register. (Si10), the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG. 21 (Si11). When the error is released, the process returns to the Si6 step again.

  If it is determined in step Si7 that a reel rotation error has occurred, an error code indicating a reel rotation error is set in the register (Si12), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. 21 (Si13). Along with this, the rotation of the reels is also temporarily stopped. When the error is released, the process returns to the Si3 step again and the reel rotation is resumed.

  If any stop switch operation is detected in step Si6, the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time (the number of steps to be the stop operation position) in the reel motor corresponding to the stop switch is calculated. After obtaining and setting the workpiece corresponding to the stop reel (Si14), the process waits until the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation stops (Si15).

  When the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop operation stops, it is determined whether or not all the reels have stopped (Si16). If all the reels have not stopped, the process returns to the Si4 step, and all the reels are If it is stopped, the reel rotation process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  As described above, in the reel rotation processing, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the rotation of the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected is continued until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. Then, on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  FIGS. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (A) executed by the CPU 41a when the interrupt 1 occurs, that is, by interrupting and executing the activation process and the game process at intervals of 0.56 ms. .

  In the timer interrupt process (A), first, interrupts are prohibited (Sj1). That is, the execution of another interrupt process during the execution of the timer interrupt process (A) is prohibited. Then, the register in use is saved in the stack area (Sj2).

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process (A) is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Sj3). In step Sj3, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process (A) is executed.

  Next, the branch counter value is referred to determine whether it is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Sj4). If it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is checked whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or whether they are rotating at a constant speed, and whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or are rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Sj8 described later and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Sj23 described later is executed (Sj5).

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is 1 (ie, timer interrupt 2) by referring to the minute counter value (Sj6). If it is not timer interrupt 2 (ie, timer interrupt 1), the reel motor Reel start processing (Sj7) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step processing (Sj8) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, a motor phase signal standby process (Sj9) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a lapse of a certain time, and an acquisition motor control process (Sj10) for updating the rotational drive amount of the acquisition motor 101, etc. After the sequential execution, the registers saved in the stack area in Sj2 are restored (Sj22), and the interrupts prohibited in the step of Sj1 are permitted. (Sj23), returns to the interrupt before processing.

  In the case of timer interrupt 2 in step Sj6, LED dynamic display processing (Sj11) for dynamically lighting various indicators, and output processing for control signals and the like for outputting data such as lighting signals for various LEDs to the output port (Sj12), random number update processing for updating various software random numbers (Sj13), time counter update processing for updating various time counters (Sj14), command transmission for transmitting commands stored in the command queue to the effect control board 90 After sequentially executing the processing (Sj15) and the external output signal update processing (Sj16) for updating the external output signal, the register saved in the stack area in Sj2 is restored (Sj22), and the interrupts prohibited in the step of Sj1 are permitted. (Sj23) and the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  If the timer interrupt 3 or the timer interrupt 4 is found in step Sj4, it is further determined by referring to the counter value for minute occurrence whether it is 3, that is, the timer interrupt 4 (Sj17). If it is not interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt 3, port input processing (Sj18) for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port, passing the origin of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R during rotation (reel reference) Pass position), detect the occurrence of a reel rotation error, check whether the initialization code at the time of stop preparation completion is set, the initialization code at the time of stop preparation completion is set, and If it is rotating at a constant speed, the process at the time of passing through the origin (Sj19) that performs the process of enabling the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel, based on the detection signals of various switches The switch input determination process (Sj20) for determining whether or not these various switches satisfy the detection condition, and the same intake motor control process (Sj21) as the step of Sj10 are sequentially executed, and then saved in the stack area at Sj2. The register is restored (Sj22), the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sj1 is permitted (Sj23), and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

  If the timer interrupt is 4 in the step of Sj17, the stop position is determined from the stop operation position when the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is determined, and the number of steps after which the stop should be calculated is calculated. Stop switch process (Sj24), the number of steps until the stop calculated in the stop switch process is counted, stop process (Sj25) to start braking by two-phase excitation when it is time to stop, brake in the stop process After executing the final stop process (Sj26) for three-phase excitation after a certain time from the start in sequence, the registers saved in the stack area in Sj2 are restored (Sj22), and the interrupts prohibited in the step of Sj1 are permitted. (Sj23), the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the control content of the stop switch process executed in the timer interrupt 4 of the timer interrupt process (A) described above by the CPU 41a.

  In the stop switch process, first, it is determined whether or not a stop operation has been detected for all reels in the order of left, middle and right (Sk1, Sk2). If no stop operation has been detected for all reels, The stop switch process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If a stop operation of any reel is detected in the step of Sk1, the stop control position corresponding to the reel is referred to and the stop operation position set for the work corresponding to the stop reel is determined. The area number to be the stop position is specified from the area number including the number of steps (Sk3), and the number of steps required from the current reel reference position to the stop position specified in the Sk3 step is calculated. After the set number of steps is set (Sk4), the stop switch process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 35 shows the control contents of the interruption interrupt process executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interruption 2, that is, when the voltage drop signal from the interruption detection circuit 48 is input, interrupting the execution process or the game process. It is a flowchart which shows.

  In the power interruption interruption process, first, interruption is prohibited (Sm1). That is, other interrupt processing is prohibited from being executed at the start of the power interruption interrupt processing. Next, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (Sm2). Note that the values of the I register and IY register described above are used, but are not saved here because the same fixed value is always set with the initialization at the time of startup.

  Next, the detection data of the voltage drop signal is acquired from the input port, and it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sm3). At this time, if the voltage drop signal is not inputted, the register saved in the stack area in Sm2 is restored (Sm4), the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sm1 is permitted (Sm5), and the process before the interrupt is performed. Return.

  If a voltage drop signal is input in step Sm3, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set (Sm6), and all output ports are initialized (Sm7). . Next, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 41c becomes 0 (Sm8), and access to the RAM 41c is performed. It is prohibited (Sm9).

  Then, except for the determination of whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sm10, where Sm10 is the same process as Sm3), a loop process in which no process is performed is entered. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the CPU 41a reliably stops operation when the power is interrupted. Further, in this loop processing, when the voltage recovers and the voltage drop signal is not input, the above-described startup processing is executed, and if the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the original processing is performed. It will return to.

  In this embodiment, after the access to the RAM 41c is prohibited, the output state of the voltage drop signal is monitored, and when the voltage drop signal is not input, it is determined that the voltage is restored, and the process proceeds to the startup process. However, no processing is performed in the loop processing, and the voltage is recovered while the loop processing is being performed, and the process proceeds to the start-up processing based on the input of the reset signal from the reset circuit 49. You may make it do.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 will be described based on the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the startup process (production), after initializing the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, and the like (Sn1), access to the RAM 91c is permitted (Sn2). Then, the RAM parity of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c is calculated (Sn3), and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity is 0 (Sn4). If the data in the RAM 91c is normal, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is 0 in the Sn4 step, the data stored in the RAM 91c is normal, so the process proceeds to the Sn5 process. The production state before power interruption is restored. In the step of Sn5, the control pattern executed before the power interruption is set, and the value of the chance counter set in the RAM 91c is initialized (updated to 0) (Sn6). Then, according to the control pattern set in the step of Sn5, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is executed (Sn7) and interrupted. Is permitted (Sn8) and the process proceeds to loop processing.

  Further, if the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sn4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is not normal. Therefore, after the RAM 91c is initialized (Sn9), the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (Sn10). The value of the chance eye counter set in the RAM 91c is initialized (updated to 0) (Sn6), and according to the control pattern set in the step of Sn10, the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, reel An effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as LEDs is executed (Sn7), an interrupt is permitted (Sn8), and the process proceeds to a loop process.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (effect) executed by the CPU 91a at intervals of 1.12 ms based on the count of the internal clock.

  In the timer interruption process (effect), first, it is determined whether or not a command is stored in the buffer, that is, whether or not a command is received from the game control unit 41 (Sp1). If no command is stored in the buffer, the process proceeds to step Sp8. If a command is stored in the buffer, the command is acquired from the buffer (Sp2), and the process proceeds to step Sp3.

  In the step of Sp3, a continuous effect process for executing a continuous effect is executed in accordance with the received command, and the process proceeds to the step of Sp4.

  In the step of Sp4, when the received command is a reel stop command, the stop sound A, the winning status of the game, the winning status of the combination, the stop reel indicated by the reel stop command, the stop operation position, and the stop position are determined. A stop sound setting process for setting a control pattern for outputting either one of the stop sounds B in the RAM 91c is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sp5.

  In step Sp5, it is determined whether or not an effect pattern for continuous effects is set in the RAM 91c. If an effect pattern for continuous effects is not set, the effect table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, An effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the winning command, an effect pattern selection process is performed in which the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game, and the process proceeds to step Sp6.

  In the step of Sp6, referring to the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b, the control pattern setting for reading the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control pattern registered corresponding to the acquired command and setting it in the RAM 91c The process is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sp7.

  In the step of Sp7, in accordance with the control pattern set in the steps of Sp4 and Sp6, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is executed. Proceed to step Sp8.

  In the step of Sp8, after updating the values of various counters such as a random number counter of the RAM 91c, the process proceeds to the step of Sp9. In the step of Sp9, the content of data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of activation is normal. Thus, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0, and the timer interrupt process (effect) is terminated.

  That is, the CPU 91a does not set the RAM parity adjustment data when the power interruption is detected like the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41, but the RAM parity adjustment data for each timer interrupt process (effect) that is periodically executed. Even if the power is cut off, it is possible to determine whether or not the content of the data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of recovery is normal.

  FIGS. 38 and 39 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the continuous effect process executed by the CPU 91a in the step Sp3 of the timer interrupt process (effect).

  In the continuous effect process, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a game state command (Sq1). When the game state command is received, the game state of the next game is set (Sq2), and the continuous effect process is performed. Then, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If it is not a game state command in the step of Sq1, it is determined whether or not the game state of the game is a normal game state (Sq3). Returning to the flowchart, if it is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect is being executed based on whether or not the continuous effect flag indicating that the continuous effect is being executed is set (Sq4).

  If the continuous effect is being executed in the step of Sq4, it is determined whether or not the received command is a winning determination command (Sq5). If it is not the winning determination command, the continuous effect process is terminated and the flowchart of FIG. If it is a winning determination command, it is determined whether or not any bonus has been won based on the contents of the command (Sq6). If any bonus has not been won, the continuous effect process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  If any bonus has been won in step Sq6, the continuous effect flag is cleared (Sq7), the continuous effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the continuous effect is not being executed in step Sq4, it is determined whether or not the received command is an internal winning command (Sq8). If the command is an internal winning command, 1 is subtracted from the value of the chance eye counter ( Sq9) It is determined whether or not the bonus has already been notified (Sq10). If the bonus has not been notified, whether or not the value of the chance eye counter exceeds 0, that is, the appearance rate of the chance eye in the normal gaming state is It is determined whether or not 1/300 is exceeded (Sq11). If the chance rate in the normal gaming state exceeds 1/300, a low probability flag is set (Sq12). If the chance rate in the normal gaming state is 1/300 or less, a high probability flag is set. A probability flag is set (Sq13).

  Next, a continuous effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute a continuous effect is executed (Sq14). In the continuous effect lottery, when no bonus is won and the low probability flag is set in the step of Sq12, that is, when the appearance rate of chance chances in the normal gaming state exceeds 1/300, 3 When the winning probability of 1993 is applied and none of the bonuses are won, and when the high probability flag is set in the step of Sq13, that is, the appearance rate of chance eyes in the normal gaming state is 1/300 or less The winning probability of 10/1993 is applied, and if any bonus is won, the winning probability of 350/1993 is applied.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous production lottery is won (Sq15). If the continuous production lottery is won, the continuous production lottery flag is set (Sq16), and the continuous production process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart of FIG. If the continuous effect lottery is not won in step Sq15, the continuous effect process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the received command is not an internal winning command in step Sq8, or if it is determined in step Sq10 that a bonus notification has been made, it is determined whether the received command is a reel stop command (Sq17). If it is not a reel stop command, the continuous effect process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 37. If it is a reel stop command, it is further determined whether or not all reels are stopped (Sq18). Even when is not stopped, the continuous effect process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If all the reels are stopped in step Sq18, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect is won based on whether or not the continuous effect winning flag is set (Sq19). If it is won, the process proceeds to step Sq23.

  If the continuous effect is not won in step Sq19, it is determined whether or not the chance eye has stopped (Sq20). If the chance eye has not stopped, the continuous effect processing is terminated, Returning to the flowchart of 37, if the chance eye has stopped, 300 is added to the value of the chance eye counter (Sq21), and it is determined whether or not the bonus has already been announced (Sq22). If the bonus has been notified, the continuous effect process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 37. If the bonus has not been notified, the process proceeds to step Sq23.

  In step Sq23, one of the continuous production patterns is selected from a plurality of continuous production patterns at a ratio according to whether or not the bonus is won. Then, the selected continuous effect pattern is set as an effect pattern for a plurality of games (Sq24), and after setting a continuous effect flag indicating that the continuous effect is being executed (Sq25), the continuous effect process is terminated, and FIG. Return to the flowchart. The continuous effect flag is cleared when the continuous effect is ended by the bonus winning or when the continuous effect of the number of games corresponding to the continuous effect pattern is ended.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of control tables in which stop positions are uniquely determined with respect to stop operation positions (areas assigned to the number of steps from the reel reference position). Among them, when all the reels are rotating, a stop control table uniquely determined for the winning situation of each role in each gaming state is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. When one of the reels is already stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the winning status of each of the game states and the stop operation position of the stopped reel The reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, and the gaming state, winning status of the combination, reel stop When all of the situations (and stopping operation positions of the stopped reels) are the same, the reel stop control is performed based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. There is no need to further select any one of the control patterns, and the control for stopping the reel does not become complicated.

  In addition, when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, more stop operation positions are defined as conditions for deriving chance chances than when no combination is won in the normal gaming state. Since the reels are controlled according to the stop control table, if any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, the chance is higher than when no combination is won in the normal gaming state. Since the eyes are derived, and the chance eyes are derived, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the bonus. For this reason, the interest by the display result of a reel can be heightened, without complicating the control at the time of stopping a reel.

  In this embodiment, the chance that is established when the display result is derived for all reels is applied, but it is established when the display result is derived for any one reel or two reels. Opportunities may be applied, for example, a display mode that is established only by deriving a “watermelon” symbol at a specific position on the left reel, or on a specific winning line when the left reel and the middle reel are stopped A display mode that is established only by deriving the “watermelon” symbol may be applied as an opportunity.

  In addition, when applying the chance that is established when the display result is derived for any one reel, if any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, any role in the normal gaming state is selected. In the normal gaming state, by selecting a stop control table in which more stop operation positions are set as stop positions where chances are established than when not winning, and performing control to stop the reels according to this stop control table If one of the bonuses is won, chances will be derived at a higher rate than if no combination is won in the normal gaming state. Can increase the player's expectation of winning. Even in such a case, it is possible to enhance the interest by the display result of the reel without complicating the control when stopping the reel.

  In this embodiment, the chances are derived on the condition that the reel stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle, and right, but other orders, for example, left, middle, etc. The chances may be derived on the condition that the reel stop operation is performed in the order of left, right, and center in addition to the order of the right, or in the order in which the reel stop operation is performed. Regardless of the chance, the chance may be derived.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any of the reels is already stopped, the stop determined uniquely with respect to the winning situation of each combination in each gaming state and the stop operation position of the stopped reel Reel stop control is performed according to the control table, even if the game status and winning status of the combination are the same, and the stop position (stop symbol) of the stopped reel is the same, stop Since different stop control tables may be applied when the stop operation positions of the reels are different, the display results of the reels can be made more diverse.

  In particular, when none of the roles is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the left reel is configured even if a stop operation is performed in any of the area numbers 16 to 23. The “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower or middle stage, and the stop operation was performed in any of the area numbers 4, 5, 12, 13, 20, 21, 23, 34 to 39, 41 on the middle reel. Even in this case, the “watermelon” symbol constituting the chance eye stops in the middle, but on the left reel, the stop operation was performed in the area numbers 17, 19, 21, and 23 of the area numbers 16 to 23. On the condition, a stop control table capable of deriving a chance is selected as the stop control table for the rotating reel. For the middle reel, the region numbers 4, 5, 12, 13, 20, 21, 23, 34 to 39 are selected. 41, a stop control table capable of deriving a chance is selected as a stop control table for the spinning reel, on condition that a stop operation has been performed in the regions of region numbers 23 and 41. When the stop position of the left reel when the left reel is stopped, or the stop position of the left reel and the middle reel when the left reel and the middle reel are stopped is the same as the stop position from which the chance chance is finally derived Even if the stop operation position is different, however, the chances may not be derived in the end, so the reel display result is monotonous when none of the roles are won in the normal gaming state (losing). Can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, the stop operation position of the stopped reel is determined in an area in which the 1/2 symbol varies, that is, in a unit less than the range in which one symbol varies, and is unique to the stop operation position. The reel stop control is performed in accordance with the stop control table defined in (1). That is, it is possible to select different stop control tables for different number of steps within the range in which one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position, and the stopped positions of the stopped reels are the same. Even if the timing at which the stop operation is performed is within the range in which one symbol fluctuates, the stop control table applied to other reels can be changed, so that the display results of each reel are further diversified. be able to.

  In this embodiment, at the time of starting the rotation of the reels, a stop control table uniquely determined with respect to the winning situation of each game state is selected for all the reels, and the selected stop control table is selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the following, and each time the reel is stopped, for each spinning reel, the winning status of each of the game states and the stop operation position of the stopped reel, that is, any one of the reels A stop control table uniquely defined for a combination of stop operation positions of stopped reels when the reels are stopped, and stop operation positions of two stopped reels when any two reels are stopped The reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. For example, any one of them is controlled. When the reels of the reels are stopped, for the spinning reels, a winning control status for each of the gaming states is selected, and a stop control table uniquely determined for the stop operation position of the stopped reels is selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), no new stop control table is selected and all the reels rotate. The remaining reels may be controlled to stop according to the stop control table selected when any one of the reels is stopped in this state.

  Further, when any one reel is stopped, for the spinning reel, a winning control for each game state, a stop control uniquely determined for the stop operation position of the stopped reel Select a table, perform reel stop control according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the winning status of each of the game states Alternatively, a stop control table uniquely determined for the stop operation position of the reel that has stopped last may be selected, and the reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when any two reels are stopped, the winning combination of each game state for each spinning reel is unique to the combination of the stop operation position of the stopped reel. The stop control table defined in (1) is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table.For example, when any two reels stop, Uniquely with respect to the winning status of each role in each gaming state, the stop operation position of any one of the stopped reels, and the stop position (display result) of the remaining reels of the stopped reels A predetermined stop control table may be selected, and reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  Further, when any one reel is stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reels for the winning status of each of the game states and the stop operation position of the stopped reels When any two reels are stopped, the stop control uniquely determined for the combination of the winning combination of each game state and the stop position (display result) of the stopped reels A table may be selected, and reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, it is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, with respect to the winning situation of each combination in each gaming state, and the stop position (display result) of the stopped reel. When a stop control table is selected and any two reels stop, the winning control uniquely determined for the combination of winning combination status of each gaming state and stop operation position of the stopped reel A table may be selected, and reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  Further, when any one reel is stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reels for the winning status of each of the game states and the stop operation position of the stopped reels When any two reels are stopped, the winning status of each combination in each gaming state, the stop operation position of one of the stopped reels, the remaining of the stopped reels A stop control table uniquely determined for the stop position (display result) of the reel may be selected, and the reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  In addition, when any one of the reels is stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel is determined for the winning status of each of the game states and the stop position of the stopped reel. When any two reels are stopped, the winning status of each combination in each gaming state, the stop operation position of one of the stopped reels, the remaining of the stopped reels A stop control table uniquely determined for the reel stop position (display result) may be selected, and the reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  In these cases, when a stop control table uniquely determined for a stop operation position or a combination of stop operation positions is selected, a unit less than the range in which one symbol fluctuates (for example, a step number unit) ) To determine the stop operation position of the stopped reel, and to perform the stop control of the reel according to the stop control table uniquely determined for the stop operation position or the combination of the stop operation positions. By doing so, it is possible to select different stop control tables for different number of steps within the range in which one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is positioned at the reference position, and the stop position of the stopped reel Even if the timing at which the stop operation is performed is within the range in which one symbol fluctuates, the stop control table applied to other reels It is possible to change, it is possible to further diversify the display result of the reels.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any of the reels has already stopped, the winning combination status for each gaming state, the stop operation position of the stopped reel, or a combination of the stop operation positions is unique. The reel stop control is performed in accordance with the stop control table that is determined in a specific manner, but when any one of the reels is already stopped, the spinning reel is A stop control table uniquely determined for the winning status of the combination and the stop position (display result) of the stopped reel is selected, and the stop control of the reel is performed according to the selected stop control table. Is already stopped, for the spinning reel, the winning status of each role in each gaming state, the stop position of the stopped reel (Display result) combining select uniquely stop control table defined with respect to the, may be performed reel stop control in accordance with the stop control table selected. As a result, if the gaming state and the winning status of the combination are the same and the stop position of the stopped reel is the same, the same stop control table is always applied. The capacity of table creation data for creation can be reduced.

  In addition, when any one reel stops, it is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel with respect to the winning status of each game state and the stop position (display result) of the stopped reel. The selected stop control table is selected, and reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. When one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), a new stop control table is selected. Instead, stop control of the remaining reels may be performed according to the stop control table selected when any one of the reels is stopped while all the reels are rotating.

  In addition, when any one reel stops, it is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel with respect to the winning status of each game state and the stop position (display result) of the stopped reel. The selected stop control table is selected, and reel stop control is performed in accordance with the selected stop control table. Further, when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the role for each game state is selected. It is also possible to select a stop control table that is uniquely determined for the winning status and the stop position (display result) of the last stopped reel, and to perform the reel stop control according to the selected stop control table.

  Even in these cases, if any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, the stop position that is a condition from which a chance is derived compared to the case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state If a stop control table with a large number of stop operation positions to be selected is selected and control is performed to stop the reels according to the stop control table, and if any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, the normal game In the state, chances are derived at a higher rate than when no combination is won, and the chances are derived, so that the player's expectation for winning the bonus can be enhanced. Even in such a case, it is possible to enhance the interest by the display result of the reel without complicating the control when stopping the reel.

  Also, in this embodiment, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state, a stop control table that defines a stop operation position from which chance chances can be derived is selected. In the state, when a specific small role has been won and other roles have not been won, in addition to the stop operation position that draws the symbol corresponding to the selected small role, a stop operation position that is a derivation condition for the chance ( For example, by selecting a stop control table that defines the “stop operation position that draws the“ watermelon ”symbol that constitutes the chance eye”, a specific small role is won and a stop corresponding to the small role cannot be drawn When a stop operation is performed at the operation position and a stop operation is performed at the stop operation position that is a condition for deriving the chance, that is, when a specific small role is won and the small role is missed (example) For example, if you win the cherry and the left reel is stopped at the stop position where the “cherry” symbol cannot be drawn on the winning line of the left reel, the “cherry-cherry-cherry” combination is also reduced. When a winning combination is applied, the winning combination is won, and the “Cherry” symbol is not drawn on the winning line with one of the reels, etc.) In this way, when a specific small role is elected and when the small role is missed, a chance item is derived, and the appearance of the chance item is a specific small item. Since it depends on the winning of the role, the appearance of the chance eyes can be dispersed moderately. In addition, since the chance rate of chances in the situation where the bonus is not won in the normal gaming state can be lowered, the possibility that one of the bonuses has been won increases when the chance is derived. Deriving the eyes can increase the player's expectation for winning the bonus.

  In addition, in a normal gaming state, when a specific small combination is won and no other combination is won, the symbol corresponding to the selected small combination does not stop for at least one of the reels. By selecting a stop control table that defines a stop operation position (for example, a stop operation position for drawing a “watermelon” symbol constituting the chance eye) as a chance eye derivation condition for a reel that is still rotating, When a small role is elected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where one of the reels cannot withdraw the symbol corresponding to the small role, that is, a specific small role is won and the small role is missed. The chance result may be established based on the display result derived on the other reels. Even in this case, a specific small role is won and the small role is selected. In the event of a spill, chances will be derived, and the appearance of chances will depend on the winning of a specific small role. The chances of appearing in a gaming state where a bonus is not won can be lowered, so when a chance is derived, the chance of winning one of the bonuses increases and the chance is derived By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the bonus.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of frames to be drawn (a stop position when a stop operation is detected in the range) for each of a plurality of consecutive step number ranges (in this embodiment, four steps each having a 1/2 symbol change). Since the stop control of the reel is performed using the stop control table uniquely determined), the capacity of the table creation data for creating the stop control table can be greatly reduced.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is uniquely determined for each region of the range where the 1/2 symbol fluctuates, that is, the unit less than the range where one symbol fluctuates, is used. The reel stop control is performed. That is, it is possible to perform reel stop control using a stop control table in which different stop positions are set for different number of steps within a range in which one symbol varies from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position. 1 Even if it is within the range where the symbol fluctuates, the display result derived by the timing of the stop operation can be changed, so the display result of the reel in various modes depending on the timing of the stop operation Can be derived.

  Further, in this embodiment, when neither bonus is won in the normal gaming state, when the left reel and the middle reel are stopped, the range in which the 1/2 symbols change (in the left reel, Rotating on condition that the stop operation was performed at the timing within the range where the area numbers 17, 19, 21, 23, and the area of the middle reel are the area numbers 23 and 41), that is, one symbol fluctuates. A stop control table from which chances can be derived is selected as the reel stop control table. That is, when the stop operation of the left reel and the middle reel is performed, the control for deriving the chance is performed on the condition that the stop operation is performed at a timing within a range where one symbol fluctuates. In the normal gaming state, if any bonus is not won, it is possible to reduce the rate at which chances are derived as much as possible. Since the chance is derived, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the bonus.

  In this embodiment, when no bonus is won in the normal gaming state, when the left reel and middle reel are stopped, the stop operation is performed at a timing within the range where one symbol fluctuates. However, when the stop operation is performed on at least one reel, the stop operation is performed at a timing within a range where one symbol fluctuates. If the control for deriving the chance is performed on the condition, the same effect can be obtained, and the stop operation is performed at a timing within a range where one symbol fluctuates for any one reel. On the condition that the chance is derived, or for any two or more reels, the stop operation is performed at a timing within a range where one symbol fluctuates. The chances are derived on the condition that the control for deriving the chance is performed on the condition that the operation is performed, and that the stop operation is performed at the timing within the range where one symbol fluctuates for all reels. Even if the control is performed, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, in this embodiment, when neither bonus is won in the normal gaming state, when the left reel and middle reel are stopped, the stop operation is performed at a timing within a range where one symbol fluctuates. By selecting a stop control table that can derive chances for the remaining reels on the condition that the failure has occurred, the chances are obtained on the condition that the stop operation has been performed at a timing within the range where one symbol fluctuates. For example, for at least one of the reels, a chance operation established at the time when the reel is derived, or a stop operation position for drawing in a symbol constituting the chance eye, By selecting a stop control table that is determined so as not to continue beyond the range where one symbol fluctuates, the timing within the range where one symbol fluctuates is selected. Control may be made to derive chances on the condition that a stop operation is performed in the game, and even in such a case, in the case where no bonus is won in the normal gaming state , It is possible to reduce the rate at which chances are derived as much as possible and increase the chances of winning one of the bonuses when chances are derived. By doing so, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the bonus.

  Also, different stop control tables are used for cases where no combination is won in the normal gaming state and when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and other combinations are not won. When deriving chances for the left reel and the middle reel to be used, one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and other than in the case where no role is won in the normal gaming state If you are not selected for the role, the average number of draws will be larger, and when deriving chances, the amount of fluctuation from when the stop operation is performed until the corresponding reel stops will be larger When a chance is derived, the bonus can be chosen as the amount of change from the reel stop operation to the actual stop increases. Since the increases, it is possible to increase the interest associated with that chance eyes is derived more.

  In this embodiment, when deriving a chance, the player wins any bonus in the normal gaming state and wins other bonuses than when no role is won in the normal gaming state. If you do not win, you use a stop control table that has a larger average number of draws, but if you do not win any role in the normal gaming state or in the normal gaming state If you use a stop control table with a different average draw-in number when you win the bonus of the other and you do not win for any other role, you can use the reel stop operation when deriving the chance Since the possibility of winning the bonus varies depending on the amount of change from when it is actually performed to when it stops, it is possible to further enhance the interest associated with the chances being derived.

  In the present embodiment, the continuous performance is executed when the chance is derived. In other words, since the continuous performance is executed in relation to the derivation of the chances that are likely to be won by the bonus, the player's expectation for the bonus is expressed by both the reel display result and the performance related to the display result. Can be increased.

  In addition, according to the stop control table uniquely determined for the winning status of the combination for each game state and the stop status of the reel (and the stop operation position of the stopped reel or the stop position of the reel) When performing stop control, for example, when the player performs a stop operation at a timing other than the stop operation position at which a chance eye can be derived, and the game is performed by performing a stop operation, the rate at which the chance eye is derived is extremely reduced. However, in this embodiment, a continuous effect lottery is executed in each game in the normal gaming state, and a continuous effect is also executed when winning the continuous effect lottery. That is, even when the chance is not derived, the continuous effect is executed when the continuous effect lottery is won. For this reason, even when the rate at which chance chances are derived is extremely reduced, a continuous effect is appropriately executed, so that a player's expectation on the bonus can be effectively increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, when no bonus is won in the normal gaming state, the chance rate of appearance is predetermined when the chance rate of appearance is less than a predetermined ratio (1/300). The continuous production lottery is performed with a higher win probability than when the ratio exceeds (1/300), and the appearance rate of chances, that is, the frequency of execution of continuous productions when the chances are derived If the number is extremely reduced, the continuous effect is executed with a high probability, and therefore, the continuous effect can be executed at an appropriate rate in the appearance history of the chances until then.

  In this embodiment, when the chance chance is derived, that is, when the combination of the display results of all reels becomes the chance eye, a continuous effect, that is, a specific effect is executed. When applying the chance that is established when one of the reels is stopped, if any one of the reels is stopped and the chance is established, the specific effect is executed from that point. Anyway.

  Further, in this embodiment, a continuous effect over a plurality of games is applied as a specific effect to be executed when a chance eye is derived. For example, an effect that is executed only for the next game with a chance eye is specified. It is also possible to apply as a specific effect. An effect executed between the time when the chance is derived and the start of the next game may be applied.

  In this embodiment, each time the reels stop, the reel to be stopped is any one of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, and the stop position of the corresponding reel. Since the reel stop command capable of specifying the area number is transmitted to the effect control unit 91, when the reel stops, the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 stops the reel. In addition, it is possible to perform different effects according to the stop operation position.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state, when the left reel and the middle reel are stopped, the stop position of the left reel and the middle reel is finally derived as a chance. Even if it is the same as the stop position, if the stop operation position of the left reel and the stop operation position of the middle reel do not satisfy the chance eye derivation condition, the chance eye is not finally derived. When the reel stop command is received and the stop operation position satisfies the chance derivation condition, the stop operation position does not satisfy the chance derivation condition, but the display result is such that the chance eye can be derived. Control for outputting the stop sound B at a higher rate is performed. For this reason, when the left reel and the middle reel are stopped, even if the same display result is obtained, there is a possibility that the chance chance is finally derived when the stop sound B is output rather than the stop sound A is output. As the stop sound B is output, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the derivation of the chance and the bonus winning.

  Also, in this embodiment, when each reel is stopped, the stop sound is played at a higher rate when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state than when no combination is won. Since B is output, it is more likely that one of the bonuses is won when the stop sound B is output than when the stop sound A is output when each reel is stopped. As the number of reels to which B is output increases, the possibility of winning one of the bonuses increases. Therefore, the expectation for winning the bonus can be more effectively enhanced by the change in these stop sounds.

  In this embodiment, when the reel stop command is received, that is, when the reel is stopped, either the stop sound A or the stop sound B is output, and the stop operation position is satisfied when the stop operation position satisfies the chance derivation condition. Although the operation position does not satisfy the derivation condition of the chance eye, the control is performed to output the stop sound B at a higher rate than the display result that the chance eye can be derived. When receiving, that is, when the reel is stopped, when the stop operation position satisfies the chance derivation condition, the stop operation position does not satisfy the chance derivation condition, but the display result is that the chance eye can be derived. However, the production mode other than the stop sound (for example, the lighting mode of the lamp or LED, the display mode of the liquid crystal display 51) is different from the usual. That in the case of the control to change the representation embodiment, the same effect as changing the reel stop sound is obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the reel stop sound output when the reel is stopped, that is, the type of effect performed when the reel is stopped, is selected at a different rate depending on the stop operation position. The type of effect performed at the time of stoppage may be selected at a different rate depending on the stop operation position of the reel that has already stopped before the reel stops. Different effects can be performed depending on not only the position but also the stop operation position.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the symbol to be stopped is selected according to the winning status of the combination and the timing of the stop operation, and the display result is derived on the reel. Is done. In other words, winning is generated not only by the winning situation of the role but also by the player's technical intervention of operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, so that the winning is prevented only by the chance factor. Security of sex will be secured. In addition, regardless of the time that the player has not operated the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the rotation of the reels for which the stop operation has not yet been detected is detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. Since the display result is derived to the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, the player does not operate the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. Thus, the display result is not derived only by the contingency element that time has passed, and it is possible to ensure the suppression of shooting characteristics.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the progress of the game is disabled, and the error state once caused by the RAM abnormality error. If it is controlled, the state in which the progress of the game is disabled will not be released unless the setting change mode is entered and the setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, the setting change Since the operation is performed by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is performed based on the setting value selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, in this embodiment, when determining whether or not winning is allowed in the internal lottery process, the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is an appropriate value (a value in the range of 1 to 6). If not, it is not determined whether or not the winning is allowed with the probability based on the default setting value (for example, setting 1). In this case as well, the error state due to the RAM abnormal error is controlled, and the game If the progress is disabled, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value is not newly selected / set based on the setting change operation, the state where the progress of the game is disabled is not released. In other words, it is guaranteed that the game will be played based on the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation even when it is not possible to properly determine whether or not the winning is allowed in the internal lottery process. Therefore, the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, the data stored in the RAM 41c is abnormal in most cases when the control cannot be continued due to a malfunction such as a power failure or the CPU 41a running out of control. For this reason, in this embodiment, since it is determined whether or not the data is normal only when the CPU 41a is activated after recovering from these states, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 41c is normal. The determination can be made only in a situation where there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data. That is, in a situation where there is a low possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data, it is not necessary to perform the determination, and the load on the CPU 41a can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that the result of the exclusive OR operation is 0 based on all the data in the RAM 41c in the power interruption processing, that is, Since it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal by determining whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all the areas in the RAM 41c at the time of recovery is 0, the determination is made as follows. It can be performed accurately and conveniently.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the power interruption interrupt processing, destruction diagnosis data (in this embodiment, 5A (H)) in which any bit is 1, that is, specific data other than 0 is stored in the RAM 41c according to a predetermined data. After storing in the address, adjustment data based on all the RAM 41c data including the destructive diagnosis data is stored so that the RAM parity becomes 0. In addition to determining whether or not the RAM parity is 0 at the start, It is determined whether or not the diagnostic data is stored normally, and it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is normal on the condition that the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnostic data is also stored normally. The control state is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 41c. As a result, when 00 (H) is stored in all areas, that is, when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0 even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the determination of the RAM parity at the time of startup is performed. However, if the data in the RAM 41c has been cleared to 0, the area in which the destructive diagnosis data is to be stored is also 0, and it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is not normal. Since it can be prevented that the data in the RAM 41c is erroneously determined to be normal, it is possible to further increase the accuracy of determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c has the correct contents at the time of activation.

  Further, when the CPU 41a determines that the RAM parity is 0 at startup and the data for destructive diagnosis is also normally stored, and determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the destructive diagnosis stored in the RAM 41c. Since the data for destruction diagnosis is still stored in the RAM 41c even after the activation, the data in the RAM 41c is not normal at the next activation, but the data is destroyed. Since diagnostic data is stored, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination as normal.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data in the RAM 41c and the progress of the game is disabled, a setting value changing operation as a condition for canceling the disabled state of the game is effective. As a result of the transition to the setting change mode (setting change processing), all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, so that the initial data of the RAM 41c due to the occurrence of an abnormality And initialization of data associated with selection / setting of set values can be performed at once, and unnecessary processing can be omitted. Further, when the CPU 41a is activated, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is ON before determining whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal. At that time, the setting key switch 37 is ON. If it is determined that there is, the determination as to whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal is not performed, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode, where a new setting value is selected and set. It can be omitted.

  In this embodiment, initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed before shifting to the setting change process. However, along with the shift to the setting change process. Initialization 1 may be performed, for example, after the setting change process is completed, or may be performed when the setting value is confirmed in the setting change process. In this case, since the inconvenience arises when the determined set value is changed, in initialization 1, all areas except the used stack area and set value work of the RAM 41c are initialized. Become.

  Further, in this embodiment, once the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the game is disabled until the setting change process is performed, but the error state due to the RAM abnormality error occurs. When initialization is performed, all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, and a set value is set to an initial value (for example, set value 1), and a reset operation is performed in this state. Thus, the game may be restarted.

  Further, in this embodiment, when determining whether or not winning is allowed in the internal lottery process, the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is an appropriate value (a value in the range of 1 to 6). If not, the RAM abnormal error state is also controlled in this case, but the setting value stored in the setting value work of the RAM 41c is not an appropriate value (a value in the range of 1 to 6). In this case, it may be determined whether or not winning is allowed with a probability based on an initial value of the set value (for example, set value 1).

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41 a transmits a command according to the progress of the game to the effect control board 90, and the effect control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 receives the command transmitted from the game control board 40. Since the CPU 41a does not need to control the presentation only by sending a command, the processing load on the CPU 41a can be reduced and the presentation can be made various. .

  Further, a command transmission line for transmitting a command from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is connected between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 via the effect relay board 80, and the game control board Since the production control board 90 is not directly connected to 40, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from the command transmission line to the CPU 41a from the outside and affecting the control of the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the voltage drop signal is input to the trigger terminal CLK / TRG, the CPU 41a interrupts the process being executed and executes the power interruption process. In the process including the process for setting the data for destructive diagnosis and the process for calculating and setting the data for adjusting the RAM parity, the process for making it possible to determine whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery or the initial setting of the output port Before performing the conversion, it is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal is input to the signal input terminal DATA. If the voltage drop signal is also input to the signal input terminal DATA, the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery. If the voltage drop signal is not input to the signal input terminal DATA, the original processing is performed. It is adapted to return.

  That is, a voltage drop signal is input to the two systems of the input unit to the game control unit 41, and the CPU 41a can execute the power interruption interrupt process even if the voltage drop signal is input to one of the input units. Before the process for enabling determination of whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the initialization of the output port, or the like is performed, it is determined again whether or not the voltage drop signal is input to the other input unit. These processes are executed only when a voltage drop signal is also input to the input section of this, and when power failure is detected by mistake, whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery is detected. Since it is possible to prevent the process for enabling the determination and the process such as the initialization of the output port from being performed, the control of the CPU 41a may be interrupted for an unnecessarily long time due to erroneous detection of power interruption. More than necessary It is possible to prevent the load it takes.

  Further, during the interruption interruption process and the timer interruption process (A) (B), other interruptions are prohibited. For example, the timer interruption process (A) (B) Even when a voltage drop signal is input during the execution of, no double interruption occurs, so that it is possible to prevent the processing load on the CPU 41a from increasing and data consistency from being lost. In particular, even if a voltage drop signal is input during the transmission of the command, the interruption does not occur and the transmission of the command is not hindered, and the transmission can be completed normally before the CPU 41a stops driving. .

  Also, when the interrupt timing of power interruption interrupt processing and the interrupt timing of timer interrupt processing (A) or timer interrupt processing (B) are simultaneous, that is, interrupt 2 and interrupt 1 or interrupt If 0 occurs at the same time, interrupt 2 is prioritized, power interruption interrupt processing is executed, and interrupt 2 is generated during execution of timer interrupt processing (A) or timer interrupt processing (B) In such a case, the interruption interrupt process is executed after the timer interruption process is completed, and the interruption interruption process is performed at the earliest possible stage while preventing multiple interruptions. The power interruption process can be reliably performed before the driving of the CPU 41a is stopped.

  In addition, the CPU 41a can execute four types of interrupts of interrupts 0 to 3, and when interrupts 1 and 4 that are set to unused are generated, the CPU 41a immediately returns to the original processing. The unused interrupt processing to be executed is executed. For this reason, even when an unused interrupt 3 occurs, the process immediately returns to the process before the interrupt. Therefore, even if an unused interrupt occurs due to noise or the like, the CPU 41a runs out of control. You can prevent problems.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 calculates and sets the RAM parity adjustment data every time the timer interrupt process (effect) is executed. In other words, the process for making it possible to determine whether or not the content of data backed up in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of recovery is periodically performed without depending on the command transmitted from the game control board 40. Even when the command is transmitted with a delay, the CPU 91a does not stop before calculating and setting the RAM parity adjustment data due to the delayed transmission of the command. The CPU 91a can accurately determine whether the data backed up in the RAM 91c is normal.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as the types of winning combinations, a small role accompanied by paying out a pachinko ball, a re-playing role that does not consume the pachinko ball for the number of bets in the next game, Special roles with transition are defined. The special role is accompanied by a transition of the gaming state and depends on the gaming state at that time, so it cannot be said to be a basic role. The playability of slot machines is not just playing a game, but the player acquires pachinko balls based on the game results, so the small role with payout of pachinko balls by winning a prize is the most basic role. It can be said that. Here, there are JAC, cherry, and bell as types of small roles, but in addition to JAC that wins with a small probability in the regular bonus, it is determined as a type of winning combination in any gaming state. . In this way, by defining the basic small combination as a winning combination regardless of the gaming state, the gameability becomes easy for the player to understand.

  When a big bonus is won in the normal gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to a big bonus that wins JACIN with a transition to a regular bonus with a relatively high probability (winning because there is no missing). The big bonus ends when the total number of pachinko balls paid out to the player in the big bonus reaches 2326, regardless of the number of digest games. Here, in a game with a big bonus (including a small role game and a regular bonus), since replay is not defined as a target character for internal lottery, no replay is won. Replay does not reduce the number of pachinko balls held by the player, but does not accompany the payout of pachinko balls, and therefore does not affect the number of pachinko balls that are the end conditions of the big bonus. In other words, even if you make a replay win during the big bonus, it will only increase the number of big bonus games unnecessarily, so by not defining the replay as a target for internal lottery in the big bonus, The game can be efficiently advanced without unnecessarily prolonging the state.

  In addition, in the regular bonus game state, since a small role (especially JAC) is won with a high probability and a large number of pachinko balls can be obtained, the player's expectation for this is high. This regular bonus is transferred not only when winning a JACIN in a small role game but also when winning a regular bonus in a normal gaming state. For this reason, even when the player is in the normal gaming state, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the regular bonus, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, in the regular bonus, JAC is also defined as a small role in addition to cherry and bell that are also defined in a normal gaming state and a small role game. Thereby, the player's sense of expectation in the regular bonus can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the display mode of JACIN for shifting the gaming state from the small role game to the regular bonus in the big bonus is configured by a combination of “Bell-Bell-JAC” and is not used as a display mode of other roles. It is. In the regular bonus, the display mode of JAC determined to be a winning in addition to the small role of cherry or bell is also composed of a combination of “replay-replay-JAC” and is not used as a display mode of other roles. . For this reason, the relationship between the display mode derived as the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the winning combination is clarified, and the gameability becomes easy for the player to understand.

  The rotation of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R is stopped within a maximum of 9 frames after the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R is detected, and the symbols to be stopped are selected from the range of 5 symbols. Can do. Here, the symbols “BELL”, “REPLAY”, and “JAC” are always arranged at intervals of 4 symbols or less for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Replay, JAC, and JACIN will not be missed when they are selected. In particular, the JAC in the regular bonus will be won with a very high probability of approximately 1 / 1.28. It becomes unnecessary, and it becomes possible to advance the game easily.

  As described above, the types of winning combinations that are subject to internal lottery for each gaming state are registered in the winning combination table by gaming state, but the number of judgment values that determine the winning probability of each combination is referred to from the determining table. Stored in the address. In the role-specific table, the number of balls to be paid out when winning for each role is also registered.

  In the role-specific table, the number of balls to be paid out is registered according to the number of bets, and when a winning of cherry or bell occurs, the number of balls to be paid out is set according to the number of bets (however, with cherry, as a result The same number of payout balls is set). Here, the bet number in the regular bonus is fixed at 1, but the bet number in the gaming state other than the regular bonus is fixed at 3. Thus, an appropriate number of pachinko balls can be paid out according to the gaming state simply by acquiring the number of payout balls according to the number of bets. Further, since it is not necessary to determine the gaming state when setting the number of payout balls, the processing steps in the winning determination process are simplified. In addition, the number of bets 1 corresponding to the regular bonus has more payout balls at the time of winning the bell than the number 3 bets. Can be improved.

  For the cherries and bells defined as winning combinations in any gaming state in the role-specific table, the storage address of the determination value number is registered for each bet number, and the determination value number is determined according to the bet number. Will be acquired. Here, the bet number in the regular bonus is fixed at 1, but the bet number in the gaming state other than the regular bonus is fixed at 3. Thereby, the internal lottery of cherries and bells can be performed with the winning probability corresponding to the gaming state only by acquiring the number of determination values according to the number of bets. In addition, since it is not necessary to determine the gaming state when acquiring the determination value number, the processing steps in the internal lottery are simplified. In addition, the bet number 1 corresponding to the regular bonus has a higher probability of winning bells and cherries than when the bet number is 3, so the player's expectation in the regular bonus is further enhanced and the interest of the game is improved. Can be made.

  In addition, the storage address of the judgment value number of each combination registered in the combination table may differ depending on the set value, but the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value. For the winning combination, the number of determination values is stored in common regardless of the set value. By storing the number of determination values in common in this way, the storage capacity required for that is reduced. However, in the role-specific table, even if the target number of the internal lottery is the same as the set bet number and the address storing the number of judgment values referenced according to the set value is different, it is stored at a different address. In some cases, the number of determination values is the same.

  In general, in the development stage, the simulation is performed while adjusting the number of determination values according to the set values for at least some of the combinations (that is, adjusting the winning probability of internal lottery). As the initial number of determination values, a different number of determination values is registered according to the set value. However, as a result of adjustment by simulation, the number of determination values when the set values are different may be the same. Although the same number of judgment values was registered as the initial number of judgment values according to the set value, the number of judgment values registered from the beginning may be used as it is depending on the result of simulation (result of simulation). The number of judgment values different from the initial value, that is, the number of judgment values may differ depending on the set value). Then, the number of determination values obtained with an appropriate result in the simulation in each case is selected as the number of determination values to be set for the mass production model.

  Here, even if the number of determination values adjusted by the simulation is the same regardless of the set value, the number of determination values is stored in the ROM 41b with the same address assignment as that in the development stage. It can be used as a model for mass production. For this reason, it is not necessary to change the method for storing the number of judgment values in the model for mass production from the model for development, so that development from the initial design stage to the model for mass production can be easily performed. Become.

  Further, the storage address of the determination value number of each combination registered in the combination table is different depending on the number of bets (1 or 3). For example, the number of determination values stored at different addresses May be the same.

  In the development model, it is normal to perform simulation while finely adjusting the judgment value data according to the number of bets (the same as when the initial number of judgment values is different) There may be cases). Here, even if the number of decision values adjusted by the simulation becomes the same regardless of the number of bets, the number of decision values is stored in the ROM 41b with the same address assignment as the address assignment in the development stage. It can be used as a model for mass production. For this reason, it is not necessary to change the method for storing the number of judgment values in the model for mass production from the model for development, so that development from the initial design stage to the model for mass production can be easily performed. Become.

  In addition, the internal lottery adds the number of judgment values of each role referred from the role-specific table to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and depending on whether or not the result of the addition overflows, Judgment is made on whether or not there is a win. For this reason, an internal lottery can be performed using the number of determination values of each combination as it is. It should be noted that when the winning determination table is generated before the actual winning determination is made, the loop processing is required twice, but according to this embodiment, the loop processing in the lottery processing can be performed only once. Thus, the processing efficiency in the entire lottery process is high.

  Further, in the internal lottery in the normal gaming state, the lottery for the small combination and re-playing combination and the lottery for the special combination are separately performed based on the same random number for internal lottery. Then, after the special combination is established, that is, in a state where the special combination winning flag is carried over, only the small combination and the re-playing combination are drawn. For this reason, a plurality of special roles will not be won in duplicate. Furthermore, since the lottery for the small role and the re-playing role can be shared before and after the special role is established, the internal lottery in the normal gaming state can be simplified, and in the state where the special role is carried over after the special role is established. Since it is only necessary to perform the lottery of the small combination and the re-playing combination, the processing efficiency of the internal lottery in the state where the winning of the special combination is carried over becomes high.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery for the small role and replaying role and the lottery for the special role are separately performed based on the same random numbers for internal lottery. In the state where the winning flag is carried over, only the small role and the re-playing role are drawn, but even after the special role is established, If a special role is won by a special role lottery, the winning may be treated as invalid. Even in this case, multiple special roles may be won in duplicate. Absent.

  In addition, from the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the small role and the re-playing role and the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the special role It is possible to specify the range of judgment values for winning a small role, replaying role, and special role independently, and the range of judgment values for winning a small role and special role in duplicate. If the value obtained as a random number for internal lottery is included in the range of judgment values for each of the small role, replaying role, and special role specified by these judgment value numbers, It is determined that the re-playing role and the special role are each elected independently, and if both the small role and the special role are included in the range of judgment values to be won, both the small role and the special role are elected. It comes to judge. For this reason, if the value within the range in which the winning of both the special role and the small role is determined is obtained as a random number for internal lottery, the special role and the small role will be won at the same time. When the value of the range in which only the winning is determined is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, only the special combination or the small combination is won. As a result, even if a small role winning is generated as a result of the game, it is not denied that the occurrence of a special role having a higher advantage than the small role is allowed. A player's expectation can be maintained.

  In this embodiment, the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the small role and the re-playing role and the address area registered in the role-specific table for the special role are stored. Based on the number of judgment values, it is possible to specify the range of judgment values for winning a small role, replaying role, and special role independently, and the range of judgment values for winning a small role and special role in duplicate. However, the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the small role and the re-playing role and the judgment value stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the special role From the number, it may be possible to specify only the range of the judgment value that the re-playing role is won alone, and the range of the judgment value that the small role and the special role are won in duplicate. According to such a configuration, the game As a result of a small role winning as a result of Expected for that you have selected haves. In addition, from the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the small role and the re-playing role and the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the special role In addition, it may be possible to specify only the range of the judgment value that the re-playing role and the special role will be won alone, and the range of the judgment value that the small role and the special role will be won, and according to such a configuration, Even if the small role is not won as a result of the game, it is not denied that the special role is won, so the player's expectation for the special role can be maintained even in such a situation. In addition, from the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the small role and the re-playing role and the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the special role In addition, it may be possible to specify only a range of judgment values for winning a re-playing role and a small role alone, a range of judgment values for winning a small role and a special role, and according to such a configuration, Even if a small role wins as a result of the game, it is not denied that the special role has been won. Therefore, even in such a situation, the player's expectation for winning the special role can be maintained.

  In this embodiment, only the big bonuses (1) and (2) and the cherry are duplicated and can be won. For example, the big bonuses (1) and (2) and the cherry and the big bonuses (1) and (2) You may be able to win a bonus and multiple types of small roles such as bells. Further, in this case, the range of determination values for winning the big bonus (1) (2) and cherry is more than the range of determination values for winning the big bonus (1) (2) and bell. Is set to be larger so that the probability of winning Big Bonus (1) (2) and Cherry at the same time is higher than the probability of winning Big Bonus (1) (2) and Bell at the same time. In this way, the chance of winning a small bonus will be higher when Cherry wins than when Bell wins, because it is more likely to be won at the same time as Big Bonus (1) (2). When winning the prize, the expectation for winning the big bonus (1) and (2) can be changed depending on the type of the small role, so that interest can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the random number for internal lottery acquired by the random number acquisition process is not used as it is from the random number generation circuit 42 by the sampling circuit 43 but is used after being processed by software. Yes. The random number generation circuit 42 generates a random number by updating at a high speed at the frequency of the pulse signal of the pulse generation circuit 42a. However, in the random number for internal lottery after processing by software, the periodicity of the update is increased by the processing. It will be lost.

  On the other hand, in the internal lottery, the number of determination values corresponding to each combination is sequentially added to the value of the random number for internal lottery. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. The random number value for the internal lottery to be set will be hardened. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player from aiming as much as possible by losing the periodicity of the random numbers for internal lottery by processing by software and varying the values.

  Moreover, the frequency of the pulse signal generated by the pulse generation circuit 42a for updating the values of the counters 42b and 42c of the random number generation circuit 42 is higher than the frequency of the operation clock of the CPU 41a, and is not an integral multiple. For this reason, it becomes difficult for the update of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 to be synchronized with the process performed by the CPU 41a. In addition, by increasing the frequency of the pulse signal of the pulse generation circuit 42a, the update speed of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 can be made extremely fast.

  On the other hand, the processing of the random number by software only needs to replace the upper byte and the lower byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 by the sampling circuit 43. Therefore, even a relatively large random number of 16 bits does not increase the load required for processing necessary to lose periodicity and can be easily acquired. Since a large random number can be acquired in this way, the probability setting in the internal lottery can be finely performed.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  For example, in the above embodiment, when the rotation of the reel is started and when the reel is stopped and the reel that is still rotating still remains, the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b are referred to. A stop control table is created for each spinning reel, but the winning status of each combination for each gaming state and the stop control table for each reel stop status are registered in the ROM 41b in advance, and the table index Based on the above, it is possible to specify the necessary stop control table according to the winning status of the role for each gaming state and the stop status of the reel, when the reel starts rotating, and when the reel stops and still rotates Refer to the table index when the remaining reels remain, and set the stop control table for each rotating reel. It may be constant.

  Further, in the above embodiment, 42 areas (frames) divided every 4 steps (every 1/2 symbol) are defined for one reel, and each area (area number) is defined as a stop control table. Corresponding to the stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is uniquely determined, that is, the stop control table in which the stop position is uniquely determined corresponding to an area less than the range in which one symbol fluctuates. The reel stop control is performed by using a stop control table in which the number of drawn symbols (stop position) is uniquely set for each symbol. By doing so, the capacity of the table creation data for creating the stop control table can be further reduced.

  In addition, the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is uniquely determined corresponding to the area less than one symbol only in a specific area such as a stop operation position that satisfies the chance derivation condition. Further, the stop control of the reel may be performed using a stop control table in which the number of drawn symbols (stop position) is uniquely determined, and in this way, the stop position with respect to the stop operation position can be diversified. Furthermore, the capacity of the table creation data for creating the stop control table can be reduced.

  In addition, stop control in which the number of drawing steps and the number of drawing frames (stop position) are uniquely determined for each area subdivided from the 1/2 symbol, for example, one step, that is, every minimum unit when the reel motor is driven. Reel stop control may be performed using a table, and in this way, the stop position can be changed in units of steps of the reel motor, and the stop position relative to the stop operation position can be further diversified. it can.

  In addition, only for a specific area such as a stop operation position that satisfies the chance derivation condition, the number of steps to be drawn and the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) are uniquely determined corresponding to one step. The number of drawn symbols (stop position) is uniquely determined every time, or the reel stop control is performed using a stop control table in which the number of drawn frames is uniquely determined for each range of a plurality of consecutive steps. In this way, the stop position with respect to the stop operation position can be further diversified, and the capacity of the table creation data for creating the stop control table can be reduced.

  Hereinafter, a modified example of the reel control using the stop control table in which the stop position is determined in units of steps will be described with reference to FIGS. In the case of Big Bonus (1) + Loss, Big Bonus (2) + Loss, Regular Bonus (1) + Loss, BB (1) Loss, BB (2) Loss, RB shown in FIGS. The case where the stop control table of the loss item is applied as it is, and here, a case where no combination is won will be described.

  In this modified example, when no combination is won in the normal game state, and all reels are still rotating, the number of drawn frames in the area numbers 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27 A stop control table in which (stop position) is determined in units of steps is selected as a left reel stop control table. In this stop control table, the first step number in the area numbers 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27 (for example, 64 steps in the case of the area number 17) is the first area, the area number 17, The range of the number of steps from the second to the last in 19, 21, 23, 25, 27 (for example, 65 to 67 steps in the case of region number 17) is set as the second region of the region number, and region numbers 17, 19 , 21, 23, 25, and 27, the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is determined for each of the first area and the second area.

  For the first area of area numbers 17, 19, and 21, the same number of frames as the number of frames drawn for area numbers 17, 19, and 21 of the item BB (1) loss shown in FIG. The number of frames is determined, and for the first area of area numbers 23, 25, and 27, it is determined for area numbers 23, 25, and 27 of the BB (2) loss and RB loss items shown in FIG. The number of frames to be drawn is the same as the number of frames to be drawn. For the second area of area numbers 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, and 27, the area numbers 17, 19, and 21 of the item of losing shown in FIG. , 23, 25, and 27, the same number of drawn frames is determined.

  In this modified example, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state and all the reels are rotating, the above-described area numbers 17, 19, 21, 23, For 25 and 27, a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is determined for each of the first area and the second area is selected, the left reel is stopped first, and area numbers 17, 19, and 21 are selected. , 23, 25, 27 when the left reel is stopped at the timing of the first area, that is, the number of steps from the reel reference position is 64, 72, 80, 88, 96, 104. As the stop control table, the stop control table corresponding to the items of BB (2) loss and RB loss shown in FIG. 17 is selected. When the middle reel is stopped and the “watermelon” symbol is tempered on the winning line L5, the stop control table on the left side corresponding to the item of the watermelon upward rising template shown in FIG. 18 is used as the stop control table for the right reel. When the “watermelon” symbol is selected on the winning line L1, the right stop control table corresponding to the item of the watermelon middle stage shown in FIG. 18 is selected as the right reel stop control table.

  That is, in this modified example, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state, the reels stop in the order of left, middle, and right, and the area numbers 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27 A chance chance is derived on the condition that the left reel is stopped at the timing of the first area, that is, the number of steps from the reel reference position is 64, 72, 80, 88, 96, 104. It becomes.

  As described above, in the above modified example, when the left reel is set to the first stop when no winning combination is won in the normal gaming state, the region numbers 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27 In one area, that is, in the area numbers 16 to 17, the left reel is stopped at a timing of 8 steps (the number of steps moved by one symbol) at an interval of 1 step. , Big Bonus (2) + Loss, Regular Bonus (1) + Loss Control The same number of frames as the stop control table applied in case of loss, and stop operation of the left reel at these timings As a result, even if none of the roles is won in the normal gaming state, the same number of draws as when the bonus is won is the same. Since the display result is to be derived, even if you usually do not win in any of the roles in the gaming state, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the bonus of winning. In addition, since the same display result is derived with the same number of drawn frames as when the bonus is won for only one step with respect to the number of steps moved by one symbol, the left is aimed at a specific symbol. Even when a reel stop operation is performed, the rate at which the same display result is derived with the same number of drawn frames as when the bonus is won will not be extremely high, Since the same display result may be derived with the same number of drawing frames as when the bonus is won in a wide range, the player's expectation for winning the bonus is more effectively increased be able to.

  Further, in the embodiment, among the plurality of stop control tables that uniquely determine the number of frames to be drawn with respect to the stop operation position, the winning status of each role in each gaming state, the reel stop status (and the stop operation that has been stopped) The stop control table uniquely determined for the position) is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, but a plurality of stop positions uniquely determining the stop position with respect to the stop operation position The reel stop control may be performed using a specific table instead of the stop control table. Specifically, when a stop operation is detected, control is performed to stop the reel at a stop position uniquely specified corresponding to the stop operation position with reference to the stop position specifying table.

  Even in this case, when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and no other winning combination is won, the stop operation position that is a condition for deriving the chance eye (the constituent symbol of the chance eye is the stop position) The specified stop operation position) is set to be larger than the stop operation position that is a derivation condition for the chance eye in the stop position specification table that is uniquely selected when no combination is won in the normal gaming state. By selecting the stop position specification table, it is possible to increase the rate at which chances are derived when any bonus is won, so the player who wins the bonus as the chance is derived Can raise the sense of expectation.

  Further, by defining a stop priority for the stop position, a plurality of stop priority tables that uniquely determine the stop position with respect to the stop operation position (the number of steps from the reel reference position) are used instead of the stop control table. Reel stop control may be performed. Specifically, when a stop operation is detected, the stop priority table is referred to, the stop priorities of all stop positions within the retractable range (up to 10 frames) from the stop operation position are compared, and the highest stop priority. The reel is stopped at a high stop position.

  Even in this case, when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and the other combination is not won, the priority of the stop position that is the derivation condition of the chance is the priority in any of the normal gaming state. By selecting a stop priority table that is set higher than the priority of the stop position, which is the derivation condition of the chance in the stop priority table that is uniquely selected when no role is won, either bonus will be Since the rate at which chances are derived when winning is increased, the player's sense of expectation for winning the bonus can be increased as the chances are derived.

  Also, select the number of draws that is uniquely determined for the winning status of each role in each gaming state, the reel stop status (and the stop operation position of the stopped reel or the stop position of the stopped reel) However, if the target stop position is within the selected number of frames to be pulled when the stop operation is performed, pull-in control is performed to pull the stop position and stop, and the stop is prohibited. Alternatively, kick control (so-called control method control) may be performed in which another stop position is pulled in and stopped so as not to stop the stop position. Since the stop position is uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (number of steps from the reel reference position) by performing the pull-in control and the kick-off control in this way, the control for deriving the display result by the pull-in control and the kick-off control is It can be said that this is a control pattern for uniquely specifying the stop position with respect to the stop operation position.

  Even in this case, when any bonus is won in the normal game state and no other combination is won, the normal game state By selecting the number of drawn frames that is set more than when none of the roles are won in, you can increase the rate at which chances are derived when any bonus is won As the chances are derived, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the bonus.

  In addition, the control pattern uniquely determined for the winning status of each role in each gaming state, the reel stop status (and the stop operation position of the stopped reel or the stop position of the stopped reel) is selected. If the reel stop control is performed according to the control pattern, the reel stop control by the stop control table, the reel stop control by the stop position specifying table, the reel stop control by the stop priority table, the pull-in control, and the kick-off control are performed. For example, only the reel that has stopped first is controlled by using the stop control table, and the other reels are controlled by pull-in control and kick-off control. The stop control may be performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a control pattern uniquely determined with respect to the winning status of each combination in each gaming state and the stop status of the reel (and the stop operation position of the stopped reel) is selected, Although the reel stop control is performed according to the control pattern, at least a control pattern uniquely determined for the winning situation of each role in each gaming state is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected control pattern. Anything you want to do.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the normal gaming state, no role is won, that is, the winning situation is one role, but both the special role and the small role and re-playing role in the internal lottery. When the range of random values for internal lottery that causes a loss is multiple ranges, and the random number value for internal lottery is a value in each range, different types of loses are assigned, types of loses, and reel stop status A control pattern uniquely defined for (and a stop operation position of a stopped reel or a stop position of a stopped reel) may be selected, and stop control of the reel may be performed according to the control pattern. In this way, even when a random value for internal lottery that causes a loss is acquired, the display result derived by the difference in the range can be changed. In, it is possible to derive a display result of the reel in a more versatile manner even in the context of the same loss.

  Further, in the case of such a configuration, for example, in the case of a loss 2 in which two types of loss 1 and 2 are assigned to the loss in the normal gaming state and the range of random numbers is smaller than the loss 1 A control pattern that can be used to derive a chance is uniquely selected only when one of the bonuses is won and no other combination is won (bonus + losing). Well, by doing this, it is possible to increase the rate at which chances are derived when any bonus is won, so the player for winning the bonus as the chance is derived Can raise the sense of expectation.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, the stop operation position is a condition from which a chance is derived compared to the case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state. By controlling the reels to stop according to the stop control table that defines a large number of points, when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, it is higher than when no combination is won in the normal gaming state Opportunities are derived in proportion, but for example, when you win a big bonus, you reach a certain reach (when you win a bonus) than when you win a regular bonus The reels are stopped according to a stop control table in which many stop operation positions that are the conditions under which the display results derived under the conditions are derived. In this way, when a big bonus is won, a specific reach is derived at a higher rate than when a regular bonus is won. By deriving a specific reach, it is possible to increase a player's expectation for winning a big bonus that can be expected to acquire more pachinko balls than a regular bonus.

  In addition, when a bonus is won in a normal gaming state and a specific small role is won, a specific small role is more effective than when only a specific small role is won in a normal gaming state. In the normal gaming state, one of the bonuses is won, and a specific bonus is won by performing a control to stop the reels according to a stop control table in which a large number of stop operation positions that are conditions to be derived to a specific winning line are determined. When winning a small role, a specific small role may be led to a specific winning line at a higher rate than when only a specific small role is won in the normal gaming state. By doing so, if you win one of the bonuses and you win a specific small role, the specific small role will be at a higher rate than if only a specific small role is won. specific Will be led to the prize line, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the bonus of winning by a particular small role is derived in specific winning line.

  Moreover, in the said Example, the determination value number storage area | region of RAM41c in which the determination value number used for an internal lottery is memorize | stored shall memorize | store the determination value number in each case using a 2 byte area | region. Of course, in a general slot machine, the number of judgment values for special roles is not often set to exceed 255 in any gaming situation. As described above, for those that do not need to set the number of determination values exceeding 255, the number of determination values may be stored using only a 1-byte area.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, some of the determination values that are common regardless of the set value are stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6, but the number of determination values is related to the set value. Even common items can be individually stored for each of the setting values 1 to 6. Further, if the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, all of them can be stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6.

  Moreover, in the said Example, it was whether it memorize | stored in common with the whole setting value 1-6, or it memorize | stored separately with respect to each of the setting values 1-6 in the said Example. However, it is assumed that the number of determination values is not stored in common for all of the setting values 1 to 6 (the common flag for the setting value is not set). About 4-6, the number of judgment values can also be made common. The same applies to the number of determination values for the bet number. For example, the bet numbers 1 and 2 may be common and the bet number 3 may be individual.

  In the above-described embodiment, the number of determination values referred to according to the number of bets for the same combination at the same set value is stored at a different address for each of the bets (1 or 3). That is, for the same combination at the same set value, even if the number of judgment values referred to according to the number of bets is the same, it is stored separately, but the combination with the same winning probability regardless of the number of bets For the role that makes the determination value number storage address common, or for the role that makes the winning probability the same regardless of the setting value and the number of bets, the address of the determination value number storage address is made common In this way, by storing the number of determination values in common, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for that purpose.

  In the embodiment, the number of determination values acquired according to the set value or the like is sequentially added to the random number value for internal lottery, but from the value of random number for internal lottery that acquired the acquired determination value number, Subtraction may be performed sequentially, and the result of the subtraction may be used as a new random value for internal lottery. When the number of determination values is subtracted from the random number value for internal lottery, it can be determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the subtraction result (here, the subtraction result becomes negative).

  In the embodiment, in the internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination according to the game situation is sequentially added to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and when the addition result overflows, the winning combination is won. It was supposed to be judged. On the other hand, a winning determination table in which a determination value for determining each combination as winning is determined for each game in accordance with the number of determination values for each combination according to the game situation, and the internal random number for internal lottery acquired It is good also as what performs an internal lottery by comparing this value with the determination value of each combination. In addition, a winning determination table in which determination values for determining each winning combination are stored in advance in the ROM 41b, and an internal lottery value is compared by comparing the acquired internal random number value with the determination value for each winning combination. It is good also as what performs.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the game can be started only by setting 3 as the bet number in the small role game in the normal gaming state and the big bonus. On the other hand, even in the small game in the normal gaming state and the big bonus, it is possible to start the game by setting 1 as the bet number, and further, by setting 2 as the bet number, You may be able to get started. As a result, when 1 or 2 is set as the bet number in the small game in the normal gaming state and the big bonus, the winning probability of the small role in the internal lottery is lower than when 3 is set as the bet number. In both cases, the number of balls to be paid out when winning a small role can be increased. For example, when 3 is set as the bet number in the small game in the normal gaming state and the big bonus, the winning probability of the bell is 1 / 4.82 and the payout ball number is 35, but the bet number is 1 or When 2 is set, the winning probability of the bell may be made lower than 1 / 4.82, and the number of payout balls may be made larger than 35 balls. Furthermore, the winning probability of the bell and the number of balls to be paid out may be changed when 1 is set as the bet number and when 2 is set.

  In the embodiment, in the internal lottery in the normal gaming state, for the same random number for internal lottery, the lottery of the small role and the replaying role referring to the role-specific table for the small role and the replaying role, and the special role The special role lottery that refers to the role-specific table is separately performed, and the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the small role and the replay role and the special role Based on the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table, the range of judgment values that each small role, replaying role, and special role win independently, and the small role and special role are won in duplicate. The range of judgment values to be specified can be specified, so that special roles and small roles can be won at the same time, but in the role table, the storage address of the number of judgment values corresponding only to special roles , Both special and small roles In the internal lottery, the storage address of the corresponding determination value number, the storage address of the determination value number corresponding only to the small role, and the storage address of the determination value number corresponding only to the replaying role are registered respectively. If the number of judgment values for each role referenced from the role table is added to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding to only the special role overflows, the special role If the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding to both the special role and the small role overflows, the winning of both the special role and the small role is determined, and the small role or replay role If the result of addition with the number of decision values corresponding to only overflows, the winning combination of only the small role or replaying role is judged, so that the special role and the small role can be won simultaneously. You can also. In other words, it is possible to specify a range of judgment values for winning a small role, a replaying role, and a special role separately from a single role-specific table, and a range of judgment values for winning a small role and a special role in duplicate. By doing so, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a special role and a small role can be won simultaneously.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a modification of the role-specific table, and FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a modification of the internal lottery process.

  The role-specific table shown in FIG. 40 includes big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus (1), regular bonus (2), JACIN, JAC, big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2 ) + Cherry, Cherry, Bell, Replay are stored in the order in which the storage addresses of the judgment value number are referred to.

  The number of determination values for each combination is registered corresponding to the number of bets (BET) set by the player in the game. This is because even with the same combination, the winning probability in the regular bonus may differ from other combinations. In addition, the number of determination values according to the number of bets for each combination may be common regardless of the set value, or may be different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus (1), Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry are the roles that are subject to internal lottery only in the normal gaming state, A storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 3 in the normal gaming state is registered. Among these combinations, the value of the common flag is 0 for the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus (1), and the storage address of the number of determination values is individually set according to the set value. Is registered. Further, for big bonus (1) + cherry and big bonus (2) + cherry, the value of the common flag is 1, and the storage address of the common determination value number is registered regardless of the set value. Regular bonus (2) and JACIN are internal lottery targets only in the small bonus game in the big bonus, and the storage address of the number of judgment values corresponding to the bet number 3 in the small bonus game is registered. . The value of the common flag for this role is 1, and a storage address for a common number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  The JAC is a role that is subject to internal lottery only with the regular bonus, and the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 1 with the regular bonus is registered. The common flag of this combination is 0, and the storage address of the common determination value number is registered regardless of the set value corresponding to each bet number. Replay is a role that is subject to internal lottery only in the normal gaming state, and a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 3 in the normal gaming state is registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Cherry and bell are the targets that are subject to internal lottery in any gaming state, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding to the number 1 bet in the regular bonus, and the number 3 bets in the normal gaming state or small role game And the storage address of the number of judgment values corresponding to. For cherry, the common flag is 1, and the storage address of the common number of determination values is registered corresponding to the number of bets regardless of the set value. For the bell, the common flag is 0, and the storage address of the number of determination values is individually registered according to the set value corresponding to each bet number.

  Next, based on the flowchart shown in FIG. 41, the modified example of the internal lottery process which CPU41a performs is demonstrated.

  In this internal lottery process, a random number acquisition process is performed (Sg101). In this random number acquisition process, a random number value for internal lottery is acquired based on the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42.

  Then, the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is read (Sg102), and whether or not the read set value is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, the set value stored in the set value work is an appropriate value. If the read set value is not a value in the range of 1 to 6, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is set in the RAM 41c (Sg104), and the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG.

  Further, if the set value read in the step of Sg103 is in the range of 1 to 6, the combinations registered in the combination table of FIG. 40 corresponding to the current gaming state are sequentially read (Sg105). The types of roles read out here are regular bonus (regular bonus (1), regular bonus (2)), big bonus (big bonus (1), big bonus (2) (+ not including cherry)), JACIN. Is determined (Sg106). If it is one of the regular bonus, big bonus, or JACIN, is the regular bonus or big bonus winning flag already set in the RAM 41c in the previous game, and whether it has been carried over without winning based on the winning flag? It is determined whether or not (Sg107). If the type of the read combination is neither a regular bonus nor a big bonus, the process proceeds to step Sg108.

  If the winning flag for the regular bonus or the big bonus has already been set, the process returns to the step of Sg 105, and further, the next registered role in the winning combination table by gaming state is read (regular bonus, big bonus and JACIN Is registered first in the role table, and this does not end the lottery process). Even if the type of the read combination is regular bonus, big bonus or JACIN, if neither the regular bonus winning flag nor the big bonus winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sg108.

  In Sg108, the number of BETs set in step Sd1 is further read, and the common flag setting status is acquired from the role-specific table in FIG. 40 for the role and the role corresponding to the read BET number. As a result, it is determined whether or not a common flag is set for the combination and the BET number (Sg109).

  If the common flag is set, the judgment value number stored in the address registered in the role-specific table of FIG. 40 for the role and the BET number is acquired (Sg110). Then, the process proceeds to step Sg112. If the common flag is not set, the setting value set in the RAM 41c is read, and the determination stored in the address registered in the role-specific table corresponding to the setting value read for the role and the BET number The number of values is acquired (Sg111). Then, the process proceeds to step Sg112.

  In the step of Sg112, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Sg110 or Sg111 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, and the result of the addition is used as a new random number value for internal lottery. Here, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred when the number of determination values is added to the value of the random number for internal lottery (Sg113). If an overflow occurs, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + cherry (Sg114). If the winning combination is not the big bonus (1) + cherry and the big bonus (2) + cherry, the winning flag of the winning combination is set in the RAM 41c (Sg114). Then, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the step of Sg114, if the combination is big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + cherry, the regular bonus or big bonus winning flag is already set in the RAM 41c in the previous game, and the winning flag It is determined whether it is carried over without winning based on (Sg116). If neither the regular bonus winning flag nor the big bonus winning flag is set, the corresponding winning flags of the big bonuses (1) and (2) and the winning flag of the cherry winning flag are respectively set in the RAM 41c (Sg117). Then, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the winning flag for the regular bonus or the big bonus has already been set in the step of Sg116, the winning flag for cherry is set in the RAM 41c (Sg118). Then, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If no overflow has occurred in the step of Sg113, it is determined whether there is a combination that has not yet been processed among the combinations determined for the gaming state (Sg119). If there is a combination that has not yet been processed, the process returns to the step of Sg105, and the processing is continued with the next combination registered in the winning combination table by gaming state as the processing target. If there is no combination not to be processed, the internal lottery process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  As described above, according to the modified example in which the role-specific table shown in FIG. 40 and the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 41 are applied, the value of the range in which the winning of both the special role and the small role is determined is the value for the internal lottery. If it is acquired as a random number, the special role and the small role will be elected at the same time, and if the value of the range where only the special role is determined is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, only the special role Will be elected. As a result, even if a small role winning is generated as a result of the game, it is not denied that the occurrence of a special role having a higher advantage than the small role is allowed. A player's expectation can be maintained. In addition, since it is not necessary to register the number of judgment values corresponding to the special role lose, it is possible to save the capacity of the ROM 41b and to share the internal lottery process regardless of the gaming state, thereby simplifying the program. it can.

  Note that, in the above configuration, the range of determination values that each of the small combination, replay combination, and special combination wins independently from the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the combination table shown in FIG. And a range of judgment values for winning a combination of small and special roles, but it is possible to replay from the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table. It may be possible to specify only a range of judgment values for winning a combination, and a range of judgment values for winning a combination of small roles and special roles. If you win a prize, you can expect to be elected for a special role. Also, from the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table, the range of judgment values that the re-playing part and special part win independently, the judgment value that the small part and special part wins redundantly However, according to such a configuration, even if a small role is not won as a result of the game, it is not denied that a special role is won. Even in the situation, the player's expectation for winning the special role can be maintained. In addition, from the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table, the range of judgment values that the re-playing part and small part wins alone, the judgment value that the small part and special part wins in duplicate However, according to such a configuration, even if a small role wins as a result of the game, it is not denied that a special role is won. Can maintain the player's expectation of winning special roles.

  In the above configuration, after the special role is established, that is, in the state where the special role winning flag is carried over, the value of the determination value range in which the special role is won alone is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. If the value of the range of judgment values for winning a combination of small roles and special roles is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, it is determined that only the small role is won, Even if multiple special roles are not won, it will be lost even when the value of the judgment value range in which small and special roles are won in duplicate is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. Even in this case, a plurality of special roles will not be won in duplicate. In addition, after the special role is established, the role-specific table in which data that can specify the range of the judgment value that the special role wins alone and the judgment value range that the small role and the special role wins are not registered, In other words, the internal lottery process may be performed by a role-specific table in which only data that can specify the range of determination values for winning a re-game player and data that can specify the range of determination values for winning a small role are registered. Even in this case, a plurality of special roles will not be won in duplicate.

  In the above embodiment, the entire high-order byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is replaced with the low-order byte, and the entire low-order byte is replaced with the high-order byte. On the other hand, data of a specific bit out of random number bits extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 may be replaced with data of other bits. Alternatively, the random number value extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 may be directly acquired as a random number for internal lottery. Further, it may be processed into a random number for internal lottery by a method different from the above embodiment.

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram of a first modification of the processing until the CPU 41a processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 into a random number for internal lottery by software. Also in the first modification, the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the 16-bit general-purpose register 41GR included in the CPU 41a.

  When the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41GR, the CPU 41a further extracts the value of the internal refresh register 41R as a processing random number. The CPU 41a adds the processing random number extracted from the refresh register 41R to the value of the upper byte of the general-purpose register 41GR (the value extracted from the upper counter 42c). The value of the lower byte of the general register 41GR (the value extracted from the lower counter 42b) is left as it is. Then, the CPU 41a obtains the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR at this time as a random number for internal lottery, and sequentially adds the number of determination values thereto.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram of a second modification of the process until the CPU 41a processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 into a random number for internal lottery by software. Also in this example, the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the 16-bit general-purpose register 41GR included in the CPU 41a.

  When the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41GR, the CPU 41a further extracts the value of the internal refresh register 41R as a processing random number. The CPU 41a adds the processing random number extracted from the refresh register 41R to the value of the upper byte of the general-purpose register 41GR (the value extracted from the upper counter 42c). The processing random number extracted from the refresh register 41R is also added to the lower byte value (the value extracted from the lower counter 42b) of the general-purpose register 41GR. Then, the CPU 41a obtains the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR at this time as a random number for internal lottery, and sequentially adds the number of determination values thereto.

  In the first and second modified examples described above, the value of the refresh register 41R is extracted as a random number for processing, and this is extracted from the high-order byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 (in the second modified example, further lower byte) ) To process random numbers. The random number processing applied here includes at least processing for adding a processing random number to the upper byte. Thereby, the variation of the random numbers for internal lottery can be increased, and the player can prevent the aiming as much as possible.

  Further, since the processing random numbers are extracted from the refresh register 41R, no special configuration is required as means for generating the processing random numbers. Moreover, the value of the refresh register 41R is updated every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction, and the update interval is not constant. Therefore, a random number with high randomness can be extracted as a processing random number. And since the randomness of the processing random number is high, the randomness of the random number for internal lottery generated using the random number is also high.

  In the first and second modifications, the value extracted from the refresh register 41R is added to the upper byte (and the lower byte) of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42. A value that is periodically updated by hardware or software may be added. Further, instead of adding a value extracted from the refresh register 41R (or a value replacing the refresh register 41R), a logical operation such as subtraction, logical sum, or logical product may be performed.

  Further, bit replacement such as replacement of the upper byte and the lower byte shown in the above embodiment may be used in combination with the first and second modifications. Also in the first and second modified examples, the interrupt to the CPU 41a is prevented in order to prevent the contents of the general-purpose register 41GR from being rewritten between the extraction of the random number from the random number generation circuit 42 and the end of the processing. It will be prohibited.

  Further, in the second modification, processing random numbers to be added to the upper and lower bytes of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 may be separately extracted from the refresh register 41R at different timings. Separately prepare the processing random number to be added to the upper byte and the processing random number to be updated to the lower byte. Means for extracting may be provided. In this case, one of the means for updating the processing random number for the upper byte and the means for updating the processing random number for the lower byte can be constituted by the refresh register 41R.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to the case where the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42, that is, the random number extracted by the hardware random number function is processed by software has been described. However, the random number processing by the software described above may be applied to random numbers that are periodically updated by software. For example, the CPU 41a sends an instruction to the second microcomputer to extract a random number periodically updated by a timer interrupt or the like in a second microcomputer different from the microcomputer constituting the game control unit 41, and I The data can be input to the CPU 41a via the / O port 41d and stored in the general-purpose register 41GR. The function of the second microcomputer may be included in the microcomputer constituting the game control unit 41. Also in this case, the random number value obtained after processing can be varied, and the effect of preventing the player from aiming can be achieved.

  In the embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 0 in the power interruption processing, and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is 0 at the time of restoration. Although it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal, of course, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 1 in the power interruption processing, and the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 1 at the time of restoration. Whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal may be determined. Further, the checksum (exclusive OR of the data stored in the corresponding area) of all areas of the RAM 41c is calculated in the power interruption processing, and is stored in a specific area, and at the time of recovery, the RAM 41c is restored. The checksum of all the areas including the specific area where the checksum is stored is calculated. If the result is 00 (H), it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, and must be 00 (H). For example, it may be determined that the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal.

  If the checksum is stored normally in the power interruption processing, the checksum of the area excluding the specific area and the data stored in the specific area (the checksum calculated at the time of power interruption) ) Should take the same value, and if the checksum of the area excluding the specific area matches the data stored in the specific area, the result of calculating the exclusive OR of both data is Since the result of calculating the checksum of all areas including the specific area where the checksum of the RAM 41c is stored is 00 (H), it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is normal. This is because it can.

  In this case as well, in the power interruption interrupt processing, before the checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data (for example, 5A (H)) in which any bit is 1 is stored at a predetermined address, and at the time of restoration In addition to determining whether or not the checksum is 00 (H), it is also determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is normally stored. The checksum is 00 (H) and the destructive diagnosis is performed. It is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal on the condition that the business data is also normal. Even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, if 00 (H) is stored in all areas, it will be determined to be normal by the checksum determination at the time of startup, After storing the destructive diagnostic data with the bit set to 1, calculate the checksum and store it in a specific area, and also check the destructive diagnostic data in addition to checking the checksum at startup, For example, even if all areas are cleared to 0 at startup, and the checksum is 00 (H) and determined to be normal, the destruction diagnosis data does not match the value stored at the time of power failure, Since the determination is made, it is possible to improve the accuracy of determining the abnormality of the data stored in the RAM 41c.

  In the above, the RAM parity or checksum of the RAM 41c is calculated in the power interruption processing and stored in the RAM 41c, and whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of restoration is 0. Or whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal based on whether or not the checksum calculated based on all the areas of the RAM 41c is 00 (H). RAM parity or checksum of the RAM 41c is calculated and stored in a specific area, and the RAM parity or checksum excluding the specific area of the RAM 41c at the time of recovery is calculated, and the RAM parity or checksum stored in the specific area is calculated. The data in the RAM 41c depends on whether the comparison result matches It may be determined whether normal or not. In this case as well, as described above, before the RAM parity or checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored at a predetermined address. In addition to determining whether or not the sums match, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally, the RAM parity and checksum match, and the destructive diagnostic data is also normal. It is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal under the above conditions.

  In the above-described embodiment, 5A (H) is stored in the RAM 41c as the failure diagnosis data in the power interruption processing. However, any data other than 0 may be stored and can be confirmed at the time of startup.

  In the above embodiment, when the CPU 41a is started, the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is calculated, it is determined whether or not the result is 0, and the destructive diagnosis data is normal on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. However, first, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally, and on condition that the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally. The RAM parity of the RAM 41c may be calculated and it may be determined whether or not the result is 0. In this way, if the destructive diagnosis data is not normally stored, the RAM parity is calculated. Without calculation, it can be determined that the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal.

  In the above embodiment, the game control unit 41 is activated based on a reset signal from a reset circuit 49 provided separately from the game control unit 41. However, the game control unit 41 is connected to the reset circuit. The microcomputer which comprises may be mounted.

  In the above embodiment, the RAM 41c is mounted on the microcomputer constituting the game control unit 41. However, a RAM used as a work of the microcomputer may be mounted outside the microcomputer.

  In the embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the DC voltage used in the slot machine 1 and detects the power interruption when the DC voltage becomes a certain voltage or lower. You may make it detect a power interruption, when the period when the said DC voltage became below a fixed voltage continued for a fixed period. Alternatively, the AC voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 may be monitored to detect a power interruption when a disturbance in the waveform of the AC voltage is detected or when the period continues for a certain period.

  In the above embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 is mounted on the game control board 40. However, the power interruption detection circuit 48 may be mounted in other places. For example, the game control board 40 may be connected to the power supply board 100 or the power supply board 100. It may be mounted on a relay board or the like through which a power supply line is connected.

  In the above embodiment, a slot machine that uses a pachinko ball to set the bet number is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko ball and credit (stored in a storage unit inside the slot machine). Slot machines that set bets using player-owned pachinko balls and medals), slot machines that set bets using medals, slot machines that use medals and credits, and credits only It may be a fully credit type slot machine that sets a bet amount using.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, in addition to the pachinko ball taking-in mechanism such as the taking-in motor 11, the sorting solenoid 102, and the taking-in ball detecting switch 105 constituting the taking-in device 100, medals inserted from the outside The flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching the flow path to either a hopper tank side or a medal payout outlet side, which will be described later, provided inside, and a medal that flows from the outside and flows down to the hopper tank side In addition to a pachinko ball payout mechanism such as a payout motor 201 and a payout ball detection switch 202 that constitute the payout device 200, a hopper tank (not shown) that stores medals inserted from the outside is provided. ), A hopper motor 34 for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank from a medal payout opening, and a hopper motor 34 A payout sensor 35 for detecting medals paid out by driving is provided, and it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using both medals and game balls. It may be applied to a slot machine to be paid out.

  Each element in the embodiment corresponds to the present invention as follows.

The slot machine according to means 1 of the present invention is:
A plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating display bands (reels 2L, 2C, and 2R) each having a plurality of identifiable symbols by driving a stepping motor (32L, 32C, and 32R). A variable display device capable of deriving and displaying the display result on each of the (left reel, middle reel, right reel)
When a predetermined number of bets (1 or 3) are set for one game by the bet number setting means, the game can be started and display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is completed and a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Respective derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
Pre-determining means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow a prize to be generated before the display result of at least one variable display area is derived;
Derivation control means (reel stop control by the CPU 41a) for performing control for deriving the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
With
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where display results have not yet been derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas, the stepping at the time when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated for a variable display area for which display results have not yet been derived. Multiple control patterns (reel stop by stop control table) that uniquely specify the display result (stop position) derived for the number of motor steps (area number assigned for each number of steps of 1/2 symbols) Control) to select a control pattern that uniquely selects a control pattern corresponding to the determination result (internal lottery result) of the pre-determining means (select a data creation table corresponding to all reels at the start of reel rotation). And a process for creating a stop control table corresponding to all reels from the selected data creation table),
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the derivation operation means is operated in the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means. Control to derive a display result uniquely specified from the number of steps at the time as a display result of the variable display area (control to stop the reel at a stop position corresponding to the stop operation position with reference to the stop control table) With
The control pattern selection means, when the determination result of the prior determination means is the first determination result (when no role is won), at least one of the number of steps A first specific control pattern (stop of losing shown in FIG. 16) in which a specific display result (display result in which the “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle or lower stage) is specified from (the number of steps corresponding to the region numbers 16 to 23) Left reel stop control by the control table), and when the determination result of the prior determination means is a second determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination result (big bonus (1)) More than the first specific control pattern among the number of steps (the number of steps corresponding to the region numbers 16 to 27) when winning and when no other combination is won The specific control pattern selection means (at the start of reel rotation) that selects the second specific control pattern (the left reel stop control based on the BB (1) loss stop control table shown in FIG. 16) for specifying the specific display result from As the data creation table corresponding to the left reel, a data creation table in which the stop operation position for drawing the “watermelon” symbol in the lower or middle stage is selected, and the stop control table corresponding to the left reel is selected from the selected data creation table. Including processing to create
It is characterized by that.

The slot machine according to means 2 of the present invention is:
A plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating display bands (reels 2L, 2C, and 2R) each having a plurality of identifiable symbols by driving a stepping motor (32L, 32C, and 32R). A variable display device capable of deriving and displaying the display result on each of the (left reel, middle reel, right reel)
When a predetermined number of bets (1 or 3) are set for one game by the bet number setting means, the game can be started and display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is completed and a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Respective derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
Pre-determining means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow a prize to be generated before the display result of at least one variable display area is derived;
Derivation control means (reel stop control by the CPU 41a) for performing control for deriving the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
With
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. The variable display area is derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated (area number assigned for each number of steps corresponding to 1/2 symbols). A variable in which the determination result (internal lottery result) of the pre-determining means and the display result have already been derived from a plurality of control patterns (reel stop control by the stop control table) that uniquely specify the display result (stop position). Control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the display result (stop position) in the display area (other than when any one reel stops) Select data creation table corresponding to the reel, including the process) to create a stop control table corresponding to the reel in the change from the selected data generation table,
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the derivation operation means is operated in the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means. Control to derive a display result uniquely specified from the number of steps at the time as a display result of the variable display area (control to stop the reel at a stop position corresponding to the stop operation position with reference to the stop control table) With
The control pattern selection means, when the determination result of the prior determination means is the first determination result (when no role is won), at least one of the number of steps A specific display result (display result in which the “watermelon” symbol stops in the middle stage) is specified from (the number of steps corresponding to the region numbers 4, 5, 12, 13, 20, 21, 23, 34 to 39, 41). A first specific control pattern (middle reel stop control based on the stop control table for loss shown in FIG. 17) is selected, and the determination result of the predetermination means is more advantageous for the player than the first determination result. When the result is a determination result of 2 (when any bonus is won and no other winning combination is won), the number of steps (BB ( ): Number of steps corresponding to region numbers 1-7, 26-29, 34-42 or region numbers 1-7, 28, 29, 34-42, BB (2), RB (1): region numbers 1-29 34 to 42), the second specific control pattern in which the specific display result is specified (according to the stop control table for BB (1) loss, BB (2) loss, and RB (1) loss shown in FIG. 17). Specific control pattern selection means to be selected (reel stop control) (as a data creation table corresponding to the middle reel when the left reel is stopped, a data creation table defining a stop operation position for drawing the "watermelon" symbol in the middle stage) Including a process of creating a stop control table corresponding to the middle reel from the selected data creation table),
It is characterized by that.

The slot machine according to means 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 1 or 2,
The derivation control means (reel stop control by the CPU 41a) is configured to perform the first specific control pattern (at the time of a loss) on at least one variable display area among the plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel). When the reel control by the stop control table is selected, the number of steps when the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated is reduced from a predetermined number of steps to one display band. The specific display result (the symbol constituting the chance eye stops on the winning line only when it is within the range rotated by one minute (when the stop operation is performed at a timing within the range where one symbol fluctuates). (Display result) is specified, and control for deriving the specific display result is performed.
It is characterized by that.

The slot machine according to means 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The specific control pattern selection means, when the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) is the second determination result (when winning a bonus and not winning another role) An average value (average number of frames to be drawn) of the amount of fluctuation from when the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated to when the specific display result (the symbol constituting the chance eye) is derived. Control patterns (BB (1) loss, BB (2) loss, RB (1) loss shown in FIG. 16) in which the specific display result is specified from a different number of steps than when the first specific control pattern is selected. The left reel stop control by the stop control table, the middle reel stop control by the BB (1) loss, BB (2) loss, and RB (1) loss stop control table shown in FIG. Selecting a second particular control pattern,
It is characterized by that.

The slot machine according to means 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The derivation control means (reel stop control by the CPU 41a) is the stepping motor (when the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are operated from the control pattern selected by the control pattern selection means. The number of steps of 32L, 32C, and 32R is within a range in which the display band is rotated by one symbol from a certain number of steps (one symbol varies from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position). A different number of steps within a range), each different display result is specified, and control is performed to derive the specified display result.
It is characterized by that.

The slot machine according to means 6 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The numerical data (0 to 65535) updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing before the determination by the pre-determining means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) is determined for each game as numerical data for determination (for internal lottery). Numerical data input means (random number acquisition by the CPU 41a) to be input to the determination area as a random number)
A range that is determined so that the range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow for the occurrence of the numerical value data for determination input to the determination region can be specified for the winning Range specifying data storage means (role-specific table (FIG. 40)) for storing specific data (storage address of the number of judgment values);
With
The range specifying data storage means determines, as the range specifying data, that it is allowed to simultaneously allow the occurrence of both the special prize and the small role winning accompanied by the provision of a game ball (pachinko ball). The overlapping range specifying data (Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry's judgment value storage address) can be stored,
The pre-determining unit determines whether or not the winning is determined depending on whether or not the determination value range specified by the range specifying data stored in the range specifying data storage unit includes the determination numerical data input to the determination region. Including a winning allowance determining means (winning determination of a winning combination) for determining whether or not the generation of a prize is permitted, and generating a winning determined to be permitted by the permission determining means. Decide to allow (set the winning flag of the winning combination is determined),
It is characterized by that.

The slot machine according to means 7 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The numerical data (0 to 65535) updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing before the determination by the pre-determining means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) is determined for each game as numerical data for determination (for internal lottery). Numerical data input means (random number acquisition by the CPU 41a) to be input to the determination area as a random number)
With respect to a small role winning (small role) accompanied by a game ball (pachinko ball), it is determined that the pre-determining means permits the generation of the numerical data for determination input in the determination area. Small role winning range specifying data storage means (a role for a small role and a re-playing role) that stores range specifying data (a storage address of the number of judgment values for a small role) determined so that a range of determination values can be specified Another table)
For the special prize (big bonus (1) (2), regular bonus (1)), it is determined that the pre-determining means allows the generation of the numerical data for determination input in the determination area. Special winning range specifying data storage means (special role-specific table) for storing range specifying data (a storage address of the number of determination values for special roles) determined so that a range of determination values can be specified When,
With
The determination value range that will determine that the pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the special prize is determined as the determination value that determines that the pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the small prize winning Including a range of determination values that overlaps with a range of values (a range of determination values of big bonus (1) -A, big bonus (2) -A),
The pre-determining means includes
Depending on whether or not the determination value range input by the determination area is included in the range of the determination value specified by the range specifying data stored in the small role winning range specifying data storage means, A small role winning allowance judging means for judging whether or not to allow the occurrence (winning judgment of the small role and re-playing role),
Does the range of determination values specified by the range specifying data stored in the special winning range specifying data storage means include the same numerical value data for determination as that used by the small prize winning allowance determining means for determination? A special winning allowance judging means for judging whether or not to allow the occurrence of the special prize depending on whether or not (special winning combination judgment),
Including
The pre-decision means is
A determination is made as to whether or not the occurrence of a winning is permitted by both the small role winning permission determining means and the special winning permission determining means;
When it is determined that both the small role winning allowance determining means and the special winning allowance determining means indicate that the occurrence of a winning is permitted, it is determined that the occurrence of both the small winning a prize and the special winning is permitted. Yes (when both big bonus (1) (2) and cherry wins are determined, both win flags are set)
It is characterized by that.

The slot machine according to means 8 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
Based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means (reset / setting switch 36), a plurality of types having different ratios (winning probabilities) for determining that the pre-decision means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) allows the occurrence of a prize An allowable stage setting means (setting change process by the CPU 41a) for selecting and setting one of the allowable stages from the allowable stages (setting values);
Data storage means (RAM 41c) for storing data for performing control of the game including data indicating the allowable stage set by the allowable stage setting means in a readable and writable manner;
Storage data determination means (determination of RAM parity and determination of destruction diagnosis data by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not the data stored in the data storage means is normal;
Disabling means (error processing by the CPU 41a) for disabling the progress of the game when the stored data determining means determines that the data stored in the data storing means is not normal;
In a state where the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means based on the operation of the setting operation means (newly set by setting change processing) On the condition that the value has been selected and set), the disabling cancellation means (transition to the game processing by the CPU 41a) that cancels the disabled state of the game and enables the progress of the game,
Comprising
It is characterized by that.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 32L, 32C, 32R Reel motor 40 Game control board 41 Game control unit 41a CPU
41b ROM
41c RAM
90 effect control board 91 effect control part 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM
100 capture device

Claims (1)

A variable display device capable of deriving a display result to each of a plurality of variable display regions capable of variably displaying by rotating a display band in which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. With
With the game can be started by setting the bet number of the predetermined number for a game using the value for a game, one game by the display result on all of the plurality of variable display area Ru is derived finished, a slot machine winning is capable generated according to a combination of the display results derived in each of the plurality of variable display area as a result of one game,
Each derivation operation means operated when deriving the display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
Pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow a winning when the predetermined number of bets are set and the game is started ;
Derivation control means for performing control to derive the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
With
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where display results have not yet been derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas, the stepping at the time when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated for a variable display area for which display results have not yet been derived. The pre-determined from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify display results that can be derived within a range from the number of steps in the derivation operation to a predetermined number of steps relative to the number of steps in the derivation operation that is the number of steps of the motor A total variation control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the means ;
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. With respect to the variable display area, a display that can be derived within a range from the number of steps in the derivation operation to a predetermined number of steps ahead of the number of steps in the derivation operation when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated. Step of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means corresponding to the determination result of the pre-determination means and the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived is operated from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the result A control pattern selection means at the time of partial variation for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the number of already derived steps that is a number,
Including
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated in the situation where the display result has not yet been derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas, the control pattern selection at the time of total variation In the control pattern uniquely selected by the means for the variable display area corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination means, it is uniquely identified from the number of steps in the derivation operation when the derivation operation means is operated. There line control to derive the displayed results as a display result of the variable display area,
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated, the variable display area is uniquely determined by the partial variation control pattern selection means corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination means and the number of already derived steps. In the control pattern selected in the above, a control is performed for deriving a display result uniquely specified from the number of steps in the derivation operation at the time when the derivation operation means is operated as a display result of the variable display area,
The total variation control pattern selection unit is configured to select a first variable display region in which a derivation operation is performed first among the plurality of variable display regions when the determination result of the prior determination unit is a predetermined determination result. The number of derivation steps within the range in which the number of steps in the derivation operation is within a range from the number of steps in the derivation operation to a predetermined number of steps ahead and a predetermined display result corresponding to the predetermined determination result can be derived A predetermined control pattern selecting means for selecting a predetermined control pattern for specifying the predetermined display result when the first derivation step number and the second derivation step number different from the first derivation step number;
In the partial variation control pattern selection means, the determination result of the prior determination means is a predetermined determination result, the display result is already derived in the first variable display area, and the display result is the predetermined determination result. If the number of already derived steps at the time when the deriving operation means corresponding to the first variable display area is operated is the first number of deriving steps, the display result has not yet been derived. For the second variable display region, the range in which the number of steps at the time of the derivation operation is within a range from the number of steps at the time of the derivation operation to a predetermined number of steps and a specific display result corresponding to the predetermined determination result can be derived. A first control pattern that identifies the specific display result is selected when the number of derivation steps is a specific number of derivation steps, and the determination result of the predetermination means is a predetermined determination result The display result has already been derived in the first variable display area, and the display result is the predetermined display result, but the existing operation at the time when the deriving operation means corresponding to the first variable display area is operated. When the derivation step number is the second derivation step number, for the second variable display area, when the derivation operation step number is the specific derivation step number, other than the specific display result. Different control pattern selection means for selecting a second control pattern for specifying a display result,
The range required for one symbol to fluctuate consists of a number of consecutive steps.
Of the symbols corresponding to the number of derivation steps within the range in which the predetermined display result can be derived, all the step numbers constituting the range of one symbol are the first derivation step numbers, and the ranges of the other symbols are A slot machine characterized in that all the number of steps constituting the second derivation step number .

Images